Mercedes B200

Disclaimer
All language versions of the Operating Instructions PDF for this vehicle model only
refer to vehicles which are intended for the German market and which therefore
comply with German regulations. Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz
Dealer, to obtain the printed Operating Instructions for other vehicle models and
vehicle years.
The Operating Instructions PDF is the latest respective version available. It was not
possible to take any deviations from your specific vehicle into account, since
Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles to the latest science technology and
modifies design and equipment. Therefore, please bear in mind that this Operating
Instructions PDF does not replace the printed Operating Instructions supplied with
the vehicle.
B-Class
Owner's Manual
B-Class Owner's Manual
É2455847682Z102)ËÍ
2455847682Z102
Order no. 6515 1677 02 Part no. 245 584 76 82 Z102 Edition ÄJ 2010/Tc
Symbols Publication details
$ Warning Internet
% Environmental note
! Possible vehicle damage Further information about Mercedes-Benz
+ Tip vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
X Action required
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
YY Continuation symbol
http://www.daimler.com
(Y page) Page reference
Display Display in the multifunction dis-
play/COMAND display Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or

suggestions you may have regarding this
manual to the technical documentation team
at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: R822,
D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany
Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise
reproduced, in whole or in part, without the
written permission of Daimler AG.
As at 30.07.2010
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz The technical documentation team at
Before you drive off, please familiarise your- Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
self with your vehicle and read this manual, motoring.
especially the safety and warning notices.
This will help you to obtain the maximum
pleasure from your vehicle and avoid endan-
gering yourself and others.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may differ according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry variant
Ravailability
The illustrations in this manual show a left-

hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-
cles, the arrangement and location of vehicle
parts and controls differ accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
Therefore, you cannot base any claims on the
illustrations or text content in this Owner's
Manual.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROwner's Manual
RBrief Instructions
RService Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass
the documents on to the new owner.
i You can get to know the important fea-
tures of your vehicle in the interactive Own-
er's Manual on the Internet at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.de/
betriebsanleitung
2455847682Z102 É2455847682Z102)ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 19
Introduction ......................................... 16 Safety ................................................... 29
Opening and closing ........................... 55
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 67
Lights and windscreen wipers ........... 77
Climate control .................................... 93
Driving and parking .......................... 105
On-board computer and displays .... 147
Stowing and features ....................... 183
Maintenance and care ...................... 203
Breakdown assistance ..................... 215
Tyres and wheels .............................. 237
Technical data ................................... 247

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Air dehumidification

Activating/deactivating with cool-
12 V socket ........................................ 200 ing .................................................... 98
Air distribution
A Setting ............................................. 99
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Airflow
Display message ............................ 165 Setting ........................................... 100
Function/notes ................................ 51 Air pressure
Warning lamp ................................. 180 see Tyre pressure
Active head restraint .......................... 35 Air-recirculation mode
Active Park Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 101
Display message ............................ 174 Air vents ............................................. 103
Active Parking Assist Glove compartment ....................... 103
Function/notes ............................. 136 Important safety information ......... 103
Towing a trailer .............................. 139 Rear ............................................... 104
Active Service System PLUS Setting the centre air vents ........... 103
see ASSYST PLUS service interval Setting the side air vents ............... 103
display Alarm system
Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 52 see ATA
Additives Anti-glare film .................................... 202
Engine oil ....................................... 253 Anti-lock Brake System
Airbag see ABS
Important safety guidelines ............. 32 Anti-Theft Alarm system
Airbags see ATA
Activation ......................................... 31 Anti-theft system
Front airbag (driver, front ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 53
passenger) ....................................... 33 Immobiliser ...................................... 53
Head/thorax sidebag ....................... 34 Interior motion sensor ..................... 53
Sidebag ............................................ 34 Aquaplaning ....................................... 126
Windowbag ...................................... 35 Armrest
Air conditioning Removing/fitting ........................... 190
Activating/deactivating ................... 97 Ashtray ............................................... 200
Activating/deactivating air-recir- ASSYST PLUS
culation mode ................................ 101 see ASSYST PLUS service interval
Controlling automatically ................. 99 display
Cooling with air dehumidification ..... 98 ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
Demisting the windscreen ............. 100 play ..................................................... 209
Setting the air distribution ............... 99 Displaying a service message (on-
Setting the airflow ......................... 100 board computer) ............................ 209
Setting the air vents ...................... 103 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Setting the temperature .................. 99 Activating/deactivating ................... 53
Switching the residual heat func- Function ........................................... 53
tion on/off ..................................... 102 Switching off the alarm .................... 53
Air-conditioning system Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 152
see Climate control Automatic car wash .......................... 210
Automatic engine start
With ECO start/stop function ........ 109
Index 5
Automatic engine switch-off Brake lamps

With ECO start/stop function ........ 108 Adaptive ........................................... 52
AUTOTRONIC Display message ............................ 168
Display message ............................ 176 Brakes
Driving tips .................................... 115 ABS .................................................. 51
Emergency mode ........................... 118 BAS .................................................. 52
Kickdown ....................................... 115 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 254
Malfunction .................................... 118 Display message ............................ 166
Program selector button ................ 115 Important safety notes .................. 125
Pulling away ................................... 108 Parking brake ................................ 124
Releasing the parking lock man- Warning lamp ................................. 178
ually ............................................... 118 Breakdown
Selector lever ................................ 114 see Flat tyre
Starting .......................................... 107 Bulbs
Trailer towing ................................. 115 Brake lamp ...................................... 88
Cornering light ................................. 86
B Dipped-beam headlamps ................. 85
Licence plate lamp ........................... 88
Backrest
Main-beam headlamps ..................... 86
Removing/fitting ........................... 193
Overview .......................................... 84
Bag hook ............................................ 195
Parking lamp (front) ......................... 86
Ball coupling
Replacing ......................................... 87
Fitting ............................................ 141
Side lamp ......................................... 86
Removing ....................................... 144
Tail lamp .......................................... 88
Storing ........................................... 144
Turn signal lamp .............................. 88
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 52
Turn signals (front) ........................... 86
Battery
Changing (key) ................................. 58
C
Charging ........................................ 229
Checking (key) ................................. 57 Care
Disconnecting ................................ 229 Automatic car wash ....................... 210
Display message ............................ 172 Display ........................................... 213
Important safety guidelines (key) ..... 57 Exterior lighting ............................. 212
Installation location ....................... 228 High-pressure cleaner .................... 210
Jump-starting ................................. 231 Matt paintwork .............................. 211
Reconnecting ................................. 230 Notes ............................................. 210
Removing/fitting ........................... 229 Paint .............................................. 211
Safety notes .................................. 227 Plastic trim .................................... 214
Belt Seat belt ........................................ 214
see Seat belt Seat covers .................................... 214
Belt tensioner Sensors ......................................... 212
Activation ......................................... 31 Tail pipes ....................................... 213
Function ........................................... 38 Trailer coupling .............................. 213
Bonnet Trim strips ..................................... 214
Closing ........................................... 205 Wheels ........................................... 211
Opening ......................................... 204 Windows ........................................ 211
Brake fluid
Notes ............................................. 254
6 Index
Wiper blades .................................. 212 Problems with "cooling with air

Wooden trim .................................. 214 dehumidification" ............................. 98
CD player/CD changer (on-board Problems with the rear window
computer) heating .......................................... 101
Audio 20/Audio 50/COMAND THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-
APS ................................................ 153 mate control (3-zone) ...................... 97
Audio 5 .......................................... 153 Clock (on-board computer) ............... 156
Central locking Cockpit ................................................. 20
Automatic locking (on-board com- Combination switch ............................ 80
puter) ............................................. 158 Constant headlamp mode
Key .................................................. 56 see Daytime driving lights
Central unlocking Consumption statistics (on-board
Key .................................................. 56 computer) .......................................... 159
Centre console ..................................... 26 Convenience closing feature .............. 63
Changing bulbs Convenience opening/closing
Dipped-beam headlamps ................. 85 Air-recirculation mode ................... 102
Important safety notes .................... 83 Convenience opening feature ............ 63
Overview of bulb types .................... 84 Coolant (engine)
Parking lamps .................................. 86 Checking the level ......................... 207
Standing lamps ................................ 86 Display message ............................ 170
Changing gears .................................. 115 Notes ............................................. 254
Child-proof locks Temperature gauge ........................ 148
Rear doors ....................................... 50 Cooling
Children see Climate control
Fastening seat belts ......................... 45 Cornering light function (display
In the vehicle ................................... 39 message) ............................................ 167
Restraint systems ............................ 39 Crash-responsive emergency light-
Child seat ing ......................................................... 83
Automatic recognition ..................... 41 Cruise control
Integrated ........................................ 44 Cruise control lever ....................... 129
Integrated, ICS padded play table .... 45 Cup holder ......................................... 198
ISOFIX .............................................. 42 Centre console .............................. 199
On the front-passenger seat ............ 40 Rear compartment ......................... 199
Recommendations ........................... 49 Current fuel consumption (on-
Suitable positions ............................ 48 board computer) ............................... 160
Troubleshooting ............................... 44
Cigarette lighter ................................ 200 D
Climate control
Activating/deactivating rear win- Dashboard
dow heating ................................... 101 see Cockpit
Air conditioning ................................ 96 Data, technical .................................. 248
Convenience opening/closing (air Date (on-board computer) ................ 156
recirculation) ................................. 102 Daytime driving lights
Demisting the windows .................. 101 Switching on/off (on-board com-
Heatmatic ........................................ 95 puter) ............................................. 157
Important safety information ........... 94
Indicator lamp .................................. 98
Index 7
Delayed switch-off Driving safety system

Exterior lighting (on-board com- ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
puter) ............................................. 157 gram) ............................................... 52
Interior lighting (on-board com- Important safety guidelines ............. 51
puter) ............................................. 158 Driving safety systems
Diesel particle filter .......................... 124 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 51
Digital speedometer ......................... 152 Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 52
Dipped beam headlamps BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 52
Changing bulbs ................................ 85 Overview .......................................... 51
Dipped-beam headlamps Steering assistant STEER CON-
Display message ............................ 167 TROL ................................................ 52
Driving abroad ................................. 78 Driving system
Symmetrical ................................... 128 Active Parking Assist ..................... 136
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 213 Driving systems
Display messages Cruise control ................................ 128
ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- Parktronic ...................................... 132
play ................................................ 209 Speedtronic ................................... 130
Brakes ........................................... 165 Driving tips ........................................ 115
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 162 Downhill gradients ......................... 125
Clearing (on-board computer) ........ 162 Driving abroad ............................... 128
Driving systems ............................. 174 Driving on flooded roads ................ 126
Engine ............................................ 170 Trailer towing ................................. 140
Key ................................................ 177 Wet road surface ........................... 125
Lamps ............................................ 166 Winter ............................................ 127
Safety systems .............................. 163 DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 153
Tyres .............................................. 175
Vehicle ........................................... 176 E
Door
Automatic locking ............................ 60 EASY-VARIO system .......................... 196
Automatic locking (on-board com- ECO start/stop function
puter) ............................................. 158 Deactivating/activating ................. 110
Display message ............................ 176 General information ....................... 108
Emergency locking ........................... 61 Electrical fuses
Emergency unlocking ....................... 60 see Fuses
Opening (from the inside) ................ 59 Electronic Stability Program
Door control panel see ESP®
Overview .......................................... 28 Emergency key element
Doors Function/notes ................................ 57
Important safety notes .................... 59 Emergency locking
Drinks holder Vehicle ............................................. 61
see Cup holder Emergency mode
Drive program AUTOTRONIC ................................. 118
Automatic ...................................... 116 Emergency release
Drive program display ...................... 114 Fuel filler flap ................................. 121
Driving abroad ............................. 78, 128 Emergency spare wheel
Service24h .................................... 209 Notes/data .................................... 245
Driving on flooded roads .................. 126 Storage location ............................ 217
Emergency starting ........................... 235
8 Index
Emergency unlocking Flat tyre

Vehicle ............................................. 60 Changing a wheel/fitting the
Engine spare wheel ................................... 222
Display message ............................ 170 MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-
Running irregularly ......................... 111 flat characteristics) ........................ 226
Starting problems .......................... 111 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 218
Starting with the key ...................... 107 Raising the vehicle ......................... 223
Stopping ........................................ 123 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 218
Warning lamp (engine diagnos- Floormat ............................................. 202
tics) ............................................... 182 Frequencies
Engine electronics ............................. 249 Mobile phone ................................. 249
Malfunction .................................... 111 Two-way radio ................................ 249
Engine number .................................. 251 Front foglamp (display message) .... 169
Engine oil Front-passenger seat
Additives ........................................ 253 Folding the backrest forward/
Checking the oil level ..................... 205 back ............................................... 189
Display message ............................ 172 Removing/fitting ........................... 187
Filling capacity ............................... 253 Fuel
Notes about oil grades ................... 252 Notes ............................................. 252
Topping up ..................................... 207 Notes about consumption ............. 252
Viscosity ........................................ 253 Refuelling ....................................... 119
Environmental protection Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 252
Note ................................................. 16 Troubleshooting ............................. 122
Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 16 Fuel consumption
Error messages Current (on-board computer) ......... 160
see Display messages see Technical data
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Fuel filler flap
gram) Emergency release ........................ 121
Display message ............................ 163 Opening/closing ............................ 121
Important safety guidelines ............. 52 Fuel filter (white display message) . 173
Warning lamp ................................. 181 Fuel level
Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc- Calling up the range (on-board
tions) .................................................. 213 computer) ...................................... 159
Exterior lighting Gauge .............................................. 22
see Lights Fuel tank
Exterior mirrors Capacity ........................................ 252
Adjusting ......................................... 74 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 75 kit) ...................................................... 217
Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 75 Fuses
Folding in when locking (on-board Fuse allocation chart ..................... 236
computer) ...................................... 159 Fuse box in the front-passenger
Out of position ................................. 75 footwell .......................................... 236
Resetting ......................................... 75 Notes ............................................. 236
F G
Fire extinguisher ............................... 217 Gear indicator .................................... 114
First-aid kit ......................................... 216 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 248
Index 9
Genuine wood trim and trim strips Integrated child seat

(cleaning instructions) ...................... 214 ICS padded play table ...................... 45
Glove compartment .......................... 185 Important safety guidelines ............. 44
Interior lighting
H Automatic control system ................ 83
Delayed switch-off (on-board
Hazard warning lamps ........................ 81
computer) ...................................... 158
Head/thorax sidebag .......................... 34
Emergency lighting .......................... 83
Headlamp cleaning system ................ 81 Manual control ................................. 83
Headlamp flasher ................................ 81 Reading lamp ................................... 82
Headlamps Interior motion sensor ........................ 53
Misting up ........................................ 82 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 42
Headlamps delayed switch-off
see Exterior lighting delayed switch-off
J
Head restraints
Active head restraints ...................... 35 Jack
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 71 Storage location ............................ 217
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 70 Using ............................................. 223
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 71 Jump-starting ..................................... 231
Fitting/removing (rear) .................... 71 see Jump-starting
Heating
see Air conditioning K
High-pressure cleaners .................... 210
Key
Hill start assist .................................. 108
Changing the battery ....................... 58
Checking the battery ....................... 57
I Convenience closing feature ............ 63
ICS padded play table ......................... 45 Convenience opening feature .......... 63
Immobiliser .......................................... 53 Display message ............................ 177
Indicator and warning lamps Malfunction ...................................... 59
ABS ................................................ 180 Modifying the programming ............. 56
Brakes ........................................... 178 Starting the engine ........................ 107
Engine diagnostics ......................... 182 Key positions
ESP® .............................................. 181 Key ................................................ 107
Fuel tank ........................................ 182 Kickdown ........................................... 115
Overview .......................................... 24
Reserve fuel ................................... 182 L
Seat belt ........................................ 178 Language (on-board computer) ........ 156
SRS ................................................ 181 Lashing eyelets ................................. 194
Instrument cluster Licence plate lamp (display mes-
Displays and controls ...................... 22 sage) ................................................... 169
Overview .......................................... 22 Lights
Selecting the language (on-board
Activating/deactivating the inte-
computer) ...................................... 156
rior lighting delayed switch-off
Submenu (on-board computer) ...... 155
(on-board computer) ...................... 158
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 24
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 79
Instrument lighting ............................. 22
Cornering light function ................... 82
see Instrument cluster lighting Daytime driving lights ...................... 79
10 Index
Dipped-beam headlamps ................. 79 Memory card (on-board computer) . 153

Driving abroad ................................. 78 Menu (on-board computer)
Foglamps ......................................... 79 Audio ............................................. 152
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 81 DVD ............................................... 154
Headlamp range .............................. 81 Menu overview .............................. 151
Light switch ..................................... 78 Message memory .......................... 162
Main-beam headlamps ..................... 80 Navigation ..................................... 154
Rear foglamp ................................... 79 Resetting to factory settings .......... 155
Switching the daytime driving Settings ......................................... 155
lights on/off (on-board computer) . 157 Standard display ............................ 152
Switching the exterior lighting Telephone ...................................... 160
delayed switch-off on/off (on- Trip computer ................................ 159
board computer) ............................ 157 Messages
Switching the surround lighting see Display messages
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 157 Mirrors
Light sensor (display message) ....... 170 Sun visor ........................................ 199
LIM indicator lamp see Exterior mirrors or Rear-view mirror
Cruise control ................................ 129 Mobile phone ..................................... 201
Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 131 Frequencies ................................... 249
Loading guidelines ............................ 184 Installation ..................................... 249
Locking Menu (on-board computer) ............ 160
Automatic ........................................ 60 Transmission output (maximum) .... 249
Emergency locking ........................... 61 Mobile telephone
From the inside (central locking see Mobile phone .......................... 201
button) ............................................. 60 Modifying the programming
Lubricant additives Key .................................................. 56
see Additives MP3
Luggage compartment enlarge- Operating (on-board computer) ..... 153
ment ................................................... 191 see separate operating instructions
Luggage compartment floor Multi-contour backrest ....................... 72
Adjusting the height ....................... 197 Multifunction display ........................ 150
stowage well, under ....................... 197 Multifunction steering wheel
Luggage cover ................................... 196 Operating the on-board computer . 149
Luggage net ....................................... 187 Overview .......................................... 25
Lumbar support ................................... 72
N
M
Navigation
Main-beam headlamps On-board computer ....................... 154
Display message ............................ 168 see separate operating instructions
Switching on/off .............................. 80 Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 106
Malfunctions
see Display messages O
Manual transmission ........................ 112
Occupant safety
Pulling away ................................... 107
Children in the vehicle ..................... 39
Shift recommendation ................... 113
Important safety notes .................... 30
Starting .......................................... 107
Odometer ........................................... 152
Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 211
Index 11
Oil Parking aid

see Engine oil Active Parking Assist ..................... 136
On-board computer Display message ............................ 174
Audio menu ................................... 152 PARKTRONIC ................................. 132
Convenience submenu .................. 159 Parking brake .................................... 124
Displaying a service message ........ 209 Display message ............................ 166
Displaying the outside tempera- Parking lamp (display message) ...... 169
ture ................................................ 152 Parking lamps
Display messages .......................... 162 Changing bulbs ................................ 86
Factory settings ............................. 155 Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ........ 86
Important safety notes .................. 148 Parking lock
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 155 Releasing manually (AUTO-
Lighting submenu .......................... 157 TRONIC) ......................................... 118
Menu overview .............................. 151 PARKTRONIC
Message memory menu ................. 162 Activating/deactivating ................. 135
Navigation menu ............................ 154 Function/notes ............................. 132
Operating video DVD ..................... 154 Malfunction .................................... 136
Operation ....................................... 149 Problem ......................................... 136
Selecting the language .................. 156 Sensor range ................................. 133
Settings menu ............................... 155 Trailer towing ................................. 135
Standard display menu .................. 152 Warning display ............................. 134
Telephone menu ............................ 160 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
Time/Date submenu ..................... 156 lamp ...................................................... 41
Trip computer menu ...................... 159 Permanent Speedtronic .................... 132
Vehicle submenu ........................... 158 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 214
Opening and closing the side trim Power supply (trailer) ....................... 144
panels ................................................... 87 Power windows
Operating system see Side windows
see On-board computer Program selector button .................. 115
Outside temperature Pulling away
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 152 AUTOTRONIC ................................. 108
Display ........................................... 149 Manual transmission ...................... 107
Overhead control panel
Overview .......................................... 27 R
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 50 Radio
Changing a station (on-board
P computer) ...................................... 152
Setting for station selection (on-
Paint code .......................................... 250 board computer) ............................ 158
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 211 see separate operating instructions
Panorama louvred sliding sunroof Range (on-board computer) ............. 159
Important safety information ........... 64 Rear bench seat
Opening/closing .............................. 65 Folding forward .............................. 191
Roller sunblind ................................. 65 Rear compartment
Parking ............................................... 123 Setting the air vents ...................... 104
Rear-compartment seat belt sta-
tus indicator ........................................ 37
12 Index
Rear foglamp (display message) ...... 169 Removing/fitting the rear seat
Rear-view mirror backrest ........................................ 193
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .......... 74 Removing/fitting the rear seat
Dipping (manual) .............................. 74 cushion .......................................... 192
Rear window heating Seat belt
Malfunction .................................... 101 Belt force limiter .............................. 38
Switching on/off ........................... 101 Belt tensioner .................................. 38
Rear window wiper ............................. 89 Cleaning ......................................... 214
Replacing the wiper blade ................ 90 Display message ............................ 163
Refuelling ........................................... 119 Fastening ......................................... 36
Reserve (fuel tank) Important safety guidelines ............. 35
see Fuel Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 37
Reserve fuel Releasing ......................................... 37
Display message ............................ 173 Warning lamp (function) ................... 37
Warning lamp ................................. 182 Seat belts
Residual heat Adjusting the height ......................... 37
Switching on/off ........................... 102 Warning lamp ................................. 178
Restraint systems Seat cushion
see SRS Removing (rear bench seat) ........... 192
Rev counter ........................................ 148 Seats
Reverse gear Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 70
Engaging (manual transmission) .... 113 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 70
Reversing lamp (display message) . . 169 Adjusting lumbar support ................ 72
Roller blind Adjusting the head restraint ............ 70
see Roller sunblind Adjusting the multicontour back-
Roller sunblind rest .................................................. 72
Panorama louvred sliding sunroof .... 65 Cleaning the cover ......................... 214
Roof carrier ........................................ 198 Correct driver's seat position ........... 68
Route Important safety instructions ........... 69
see Route guidance (on-board Switching seat heating on/off ......... 72
computer) Seat ventilation
Route guidance (on-board com- Malfunction indicator lamp .............. 73
puter) .................................................. 154 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 212
Service indicator
S see ASSYST PLUS service interval
display
Safety Service products
Children in the vehicle ..................... 39 Brake fluid ..................................... 254
Child restraint systems .................... 39 Coolant (engine) ............................ 254
Safety systems Engine oil ....................................... 252
see Driving safety systems Fuel ................................................ 252
Seat Important safety notes .................. 251
Folding the rear bench seat Notes ............................................. 251
forward .......................................... 191 Settings
Removing/fitting the front- Factory (on-board computer) ......... 155
passenger seat .............................. 187 On-board computer ....................... 155
Shift recommendation ...................... 113
Sidebag ................................................ 34
Index 13
Side window Status line (on-board computer)

Important safety notes .................... 62 Multi-function display .................... 150
Side windows Selecting the display ...................... 156
Convenience closing ........................ 63 STEER CONTROL .................................. 52
Convenience opening ...................... 63 Steering (display message) .............. 177
Opening/closing .............................. 62 Steering wheel
resetting .......................................... 63 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 73
Troubleshooting ............................... 64 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 149
Sliding sunroof Gearshift buttons ........................... 115
see Panorama louvred sliding sunroof Important safety instructions ........... 73
Snow chains ...................................... 127 Stowage
Socket ................................................ 200 Backrest ........................................ 187
Cockpit .......................................... 200 Stowage compartments
Luggage compartment ................... 201 Armrest (under) ............................. 186
Rear compartment ......................... 201 Boxes under the driver's seat/
Spare wheel front-passenger seat ...................... 186
Notes/data .................................... 245 Centre console .............................. 185
Storage location ............................ 217 Cup holder ..................................... 198
see Emergency spare wheel Glove compartment ....................... 185
Spectacles compartment ................. 185 Luggage compartment ................... 186
Speed limiter Rear ............................................... 186
SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 130 Stowage space
Speedometer Important safety information ......... 185
Digital speedometer (on-board Submenu (on-board computer)
computer) ...................................... 152 Convenience .................................. 159
Setting the unit (on-board com- Instrument cluster ......................... 155
puter) ............................................. 155 Lighting .......................................... 157
Speedtronic Time/Date ..................................... 156
Display message ............................ 174 Vehicle ........................................... 158
Permanent ..................................... 132 Summer opening
Variable ......................................... 131 see Convenience opening feature
SPEEDTRONIC Sun visor ............................................ 199
Function/notes ............................. 130 Supplemental Restraint System
Spraying nozzles see SRS
Adjustment ...................................... 90 Surround lighting (on-board com-
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- puter) .................................................. 157
tem) Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 53
Display message ............................ 164
Introduction ..................................... 31 T
Warning lamp ................................. 181
Tailgate
Warning lamp (function) ................... 31
Standard display (on-board com- Display message ............................ 176
Important safety guidelines ............. 61
puter) .................................................. 152
Opening dimensions ...................... 259
Starting the engine
Tail lamp (display message) ............. 168
Important safety instructions ......... 107
Technical data
Station
B 160 ............................................. 255
see Radio
B 160 BlueEFFICIENCY .................. 255
14 Index
B 180 ............................................. 256 Display message ............................ 167

B 180 BlueEFFICIENCY .................. 256 Power supply ................................. 144
B 180 CDI ...................................... 258 Trailer coupling (cleaning instruc-
B 200 ............................................. 257 tions) .................................................. 213
B 200 CDI ...................................... 258 Trailer loads
B 200 Turbo ................................... 257 Technical data ............................... 260
Notes ............................................. 248 Trailer towing .................................... 115
Trailer loads ................................... 260 Driving tips .................................... 140
Tyres/wheels ................................. 243 Malfunction .................................... 146
Telephone Mounting dimensions .................... 259
Accepting a call ............................. 160 Parktronic ...................................... 135
Display message ............................ 176 Transmission position display ......... 114
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 160 Transmission positions .................... 114
Number from the phone book ........ 161 Trip computer (on-board com-
Redialling ....................................... 161 puter) .................................................. 159
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 161 Trip meter
Telephone compartment .................. 186 Calling up ....................................... 152
Temperature Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 159
Coolant .......................................... 148 Turn signal (display message) ......... 167
Displaying the outside tempera- Turn signal lamps ................................ 80
ture ................................................ 152 Two-way radio
Outside temperature ...................... 149 Frequencies ................................... 249
Setting ............................................. 99 Installation ..................................... 249
TEMPOMAT Transmission output (maximum) .... 249
Function/notes ............................. 128 Type identification plate
Through-loading ................................ 189 see Vehicle identification plate
Time (on-board computer) ................ 156 Tyre grip ............................................. 126
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 218 Tyre pressure
Top Tether ............................................ 43 Display message ............................ 175
Total distance recorder .................... 152 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 221
Tow-away protection .......................... 53 Pressure loss warning .................... 241
Towing Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 221
Important safety notes .................. 232 Recommended ............................... 239
Towing a trailer Tyres
Active Parking Assist ..................... 139 Checking ........................................ 238
Towing away Cleaning ......................................... 239
Fitting the towing eye .................... 233 Direction of rotation ...................... 242
Removing the towing eye ............... 234 Flat tyre ......................................... 218
Tow-starting Guidelines to be observed ............. 238
Emergency engine starting ............ 235 MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-
Fitting the towing eye .................... 235 flat characteristics) ........................ 226
Removing the towing eye ............... 235 Replacing ....................................... 242
Trailer Storing ........................................... 239
7-pin connector ............................. 145 Tyre size (data) .............................. 243
Coupling up ................................... 143 Tyre tread ...................................... 239
Decoupling ..................................... 143 Tyres and wheels (important
safety information) ........................... 238
Index 15
U Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 226

Wheel chock ...................................... 223
Unlocking Wheels
Emergency unlocking ....................... 60 Changing/replacing ....................... 242
From inside the vehicle (central Changing a wheel .......................... 222
unlocking button) ............................. 60 Checking ........................................ 238
Cleaning ......................................... 211
V Fitting a wheel ............................... 225
Vanity mirror Guidelines to be observed ............. 238
Sun visor ........................................ 199 Removing a wheel .......................... 225
Variable Speedtronic ........................ 131 Tightening torque ........................... 226
Vehicle Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 243
Emergency unlocking ................. 60, 61 Windowbag .......................................... 35
Equipment ....................................... 16 Windows
Individual settings (on-board com- see Side windows
puter) ............................................. 155 Windows (cleaning instructions) ..... 211
Leaving parked up ......................... 124 Windscreen
Lowering ........................................ 226 Demisting ...................................... 100
Raising ........................................... 223 Windscreen washer system ............. 208
Towing away .................................. 232 Windscreen wipers
Tow-starting ................................... 232 Adjusting the spraying nozzles ......... 90
Transporting .................................. 235 Replacing the wiper blades .............. 89
Vehicle data Switching on/off .............................. 88
see Technical data Troubleshooting ............................... 91
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 255 Winter driving ............................ 126, 127
Vehicle electronics ........................... 249 Winter tyres ....................................... 126
Vehicle identification number Limiting the speed (on-board com-
see VIN puter) ............................................. 158
Vehicle identification plate .............. 250 Wiper blades
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 217 Cleaning ......................................... 212
Vehicle weights ................................. 255 Replacing ......................................... 89
Vents
see Air vents .................................. 103
Video (DVD) ........................................ 154
Video DVD (on-board computer) ...... 154
VIN ...................................................... 250
W
Warning and indicator lamps
LIM (cruise control) ........................ 129
LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 131
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 41
Warning triangle ................................ 216
Washer fluid (display message) ....... 177
see Washer fluid (display message)
Washer fluid reservoir
Removing/fitting ............................. 85
16 Introduction
Protection of the environment Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.
Notes Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.
H Environmental note Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
environmental protection. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
The objectives are for the natural resources
which form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner Returning end-of-life vehicles
which takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account. Mercedes-Benz will take back your
Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-
You too can help to protect the environment
mentally responsible manner, in accordance
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
with the European Union (EU) End of Life
tally responsible manner.
Vehicles Directive.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on
vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of up to
the following factors:
3.5 t, in accordance with national regulations.
Roperating conditions of your vehicle For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been
Ryour personal driving style meeting all the legal requirements for a
You can influence both factors. You should design which allows for recycling and reuse.
bear the following in mind: There is a network of return points and dis-
assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-
Operating conditions:
cle in an environmentally responsible man-
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- ner. The options for recycling vehicles and
sumption. parts are constantly being developed and
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are improved. This means that your Mercedes-
always correct. Benz will also continue to meet even the
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. increased recycling quotas in the future in
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- good time. You can obtain further information
tion. from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
or your national hotline number.
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
Vehicle equipment
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals. This Owner's Manual describes all models
Ralways have maintenance work carried out and all standard and optional equipment of
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a your vehicle available at the time of publica-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. tion of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific
Personal driving style: differences are possible. Please note that
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
your vehicle may not be equipped with all fea-
tures described. This also applies to safety-
starting the engine.
relevant systems and functions. The equip-
Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle
ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from
stationary. that shown in the descriptions and illustra-
tions. All the systems found in your vehicle
Introduction 17
are listed in the original purchase agreement G Risk of accident

of your vehicle. Should you have any ques- If work on electronic equipment and its soft-
tions concerning equipment and operation, ware is carried out incorrectly, this equipment
please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service could stop working. The electronic systems
Centre. are networked via interfaces. Tampering with
these electronic systems could cause mal-
functions in systems which have not been
Operating safety modified. Malfunctions such as these can
Safety notes seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating
safety and therefore your own safety.
G Risk of accident and injury You should therefore have all work and mod-
All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work ifications to electronic components carried
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- out at a qualified specialist workshop.
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. The specialist workshop G Risk of accident
must have the necessary specialist knowl- Driving over obstacles or on unpaved roads
edge and tools to carry out the work required. could cause heavy impacts to the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a underbody, wheels or tyres. This could cause
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- your vehicle to be damaged, which in turn
pose. might lead to an accident.
You should therefore drive over obstacles
G Risk of accident and injury slowly. Avoid driving on unpaved roads and
Some safety systems only function when the tracks. If the vehicle underbody, wheels or
engine is running. You should therefore never tyres have been hit, have the vehicle checked
switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, at a qualified specialist workshop.
the safety systems of your vehicle may not
function correctly and as a result will no lon- ! The vehicle is only suitable for driving on
ger protect you and other persons as inten- paved roads. You could damage the vehicle
ded. In addition, there is a risk that you may if you drive on unpaved roads and tracks.
lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an Amongst others, safety-relevant systems
accident. could fail as a result.
G Risk of accident and injury

Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations Vehicle registration
made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables
Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres
under coverings, could cause the safety sys-
to carry out technical inspections on certain
tems of your vehicle to stop working properly.
vehicles to improve their quality or safety.
The safety systems would thus no longer pro-
tect you and other persons as intended. In If you did not purchase your vehicle from an
addition, there is a risk that you may lose con- authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle
trol of your vehicle and thus cause an acci- has never been inspected at a Mercedes-
dent. Benz Service Centre, it is possible that your
vehicle is not registered in your name with
All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only
installations or modifications, should there-
inform you about vehicle checks if it has your
fore be carried out at a qualified specialist
registration data.
workshop.
Z
18 Introduction
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a which record the technical reactions of vehi-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. cle components to certain driving situations
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible (e.g. airbag deployment or ESP® interven-
about any change in address or vehicle own- tion).
ership. This data is used exclusively to:
Rassist in the rectification of faults and
defects
Correct use
Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop
Observe the following information when using vehicle functions
your vehicle: The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
Rthe safety notes in this manual movements.
Rthe "Technical data" section in this manual When your vehicle is serviced by Mercedes-
Rnational road traffic regulations Benz, this technical information can be read
Rnational road traffic licensing regulations out from the fault memory. This is performed
by authorised employees of the Mercedes-
G Risk of injury Benz service network using special diagnos-
Various warning stickers are affixed to your tic computers.
vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten- After a fault has been rectified, the informa-
tion, and the attention of others, to various tion is deleted from the memory. Other mem-
dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warn- ory data is constantly overwritten.
ing stickers unless the sticker clearly states
that you may do so.
If you remove the warning stickers, you or Other devices that store data
others could be injured by failing to recognise Depending on the equipment level, your vehi-
certain dangers. cle may feature communications and/or
entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devi-
ces, telephone systems). These allow you to
Implied warranty save and edit data required for the operation
! Follow the instructions in this manual of the respective device.
about the proper operation of your vehicle Further information on operation (e.g. on
as well as about possible vehicle damage. deleting data) can be found in the separate
Damage to your vehicle that arises from operating instructions.
culpable contraventions against these
instructions are not covered either by
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty of
Daimler AG.
Data stored in the vehicle

Fault data
Components critical for vehicle operation are
equipped with fault data memories as stand-
ard. There are also data storage devices
19
Cockpit ................................................. 20
Instrument cluster .............................. 22
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 25
At a glance
Centre console .................................... 26
Overhead control panel ...................... 27
Door control panel .............................. 28
20 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page
: Opens the bonnet 204
; On-board diagnostics con-
nection
= Combination switch 80
? Cruise control lever 129
A Horn
B Instrument cluster 22
C PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 132
D Overhead control panel 27
E Controls Heatmatic, the air-
conditioning system or
THERMOTRONIC 94
F Ignition lock 107
G Adjusts the steering wheel 73
H Headlamp range adjust-
ment 81
I Light switch 78
Cockpit 21
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Overhead control panel 27 E Light switch 78
; PARKTRONIC warning dis- F Headlamp range adjust-
play 132 ment 81
= Combination switch 80 G Ignition lock 107
? Cruise control lever 129 H Adjusts the steering wheel
manually 73
A Instrument cluster 22
I Controls Heatmatic, the air-
B Horn conditioning system or
C On-board diagnostics con- THERMOTRONIC 94
nection
D Opens the bonnet 204
22 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
i Instrument cluster, kilometres Function Page

Function Page E Multifunction display 150
: Speedometer F Rear window wiper
; Multifunction display 150 switched on 88
= G Reset button
Rev counter 148
Instrument cluster lighting
? Fuel gauge brightness control: turn
A clockwise or anti-clockwise
Outside temperature1 149
Digital speedometer 156 H Coolant temperature 148
B Clock 156
SPEEDTRONIC: stored limit
speed 130
C Drive program2 114
ECO start/stop function 108
Gearshift recommenda-
tion3 113
D Transmission position2 114
1 Vehicles for United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature.
2 Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC.
3 Vehicles with manual transmission.
Instrument cluster 23
At a glance
i Instrument cluster, miles Function Page
Function Page D Transmission position5 114
: Speedometer E Multifunction display 150
; Multifunction display 150 F Rear window wiper
= Rev counter 148 switched on 88
? Fuel gauge G Reset button

Instrument cluster lighting
A Outside temperature4 149 brightness control: turn
Digital speedometer 156 clockwise or anti-clockwise
B Clock 156 H Coolant temperature 148
SPEEDTRONIC: stored limit
speed 130
C Drive program5. 114
ECO start/stop function 108
Gearshift recommenda-
tion6 113
4 Vehicles for United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature.
5 Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC.
6 Vehicles with manual transmission.
24 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: LIM 130 D Engine diagnostics 182
; ESP® 181 E Reserve fuel 182
= Turn signal 80 F Main-beam headlamps 80
? Turn signal 80 G Dipped-beam headlamps 79
A ABS 180 H Seat belt 178
B Diesel engine: preglow 107 I Brakes 178
C SRS 181
Multifunction steering wheel 25
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 150 A &*
; Audio system/COMAND Scrolls back and forth
APS; see the separate oper- within a menu 151
ating instructions B VU
= WX Selects a menu: scrolls
Selects submenus in the back and forth 151
Settings menu 155
Changes values
Adjusts the volume
? ~
Rejects or ends a call 160
Exits telephone book/
redial memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
26 Centre console
Centre console
At a glance

: Hazard warning lamps 81 E Gear lever 112
; 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG Selector lever 114
OFF indicator lamp 41 F AUTOTRONIC: selects the
= drive program 115
COMAND APS/audio sys-
tem; see the separate oper- G Parking brake 123
ating instructions
H Armrest 186
? Adjusts the seat heating 72
I Stowage compartment 185
A ECO start/stop function 108
J Cup holder 199
B Interior motion sensor/
tow-away protection 53
C PARKTRONIC 132
D Stowage compartment 185
Ashtray 200
Cigarette lighter 200
Overhead control panel 27
At a glance
Function Page
: w To switch the rear
interior lighting on/off 83
; | To switch the auto-
matic interior lighting con-
trol on/off 83
= 2 To open/close the
panorama louvred sliding
sunroof 65
? p To switch the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 82
A Rear-view mirror 74
B p To switch the left-
hand reading lamp on/off 82
C c To switch the front
interior lighting on/off 83
The arrangement of the controls may vary,

depending on the equipment in the vehicle.
28 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance
Function Page
: 7 Adjusts the exterior
mirrors 74
; ª Folds the exterior mir-
rors in/out 75
= \ Selects the right exte-
rior mirror 74
? W Opens/closes the
front side windows 62
A W Opens/closes the
rear side windows 62
B n Activates/deacti-
vates the override feature
for the side windows in the
rear compartment 50
C % Unlocks the vehicle 60
D & Locks the vehicle 60
E Opens the door 59
F Z Selects the left exte-
rior mirror 74
29
Vehicle equipment .............................. 30

Occupant safety .................................. 30
Children in the vehicle ........................ 39
Driving safety systems ....................... 51
Anti-theft systems .............................. 53
Safety
30 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment types of accidents, e.g. in situations where

airbag deployment would not increase the
i This Owner's Manual describes all models protection afforded by a correctly worn
and all standard and optional equipment of seat belt. Airbag deployment only provides
your vehicle available at the time of publi- increased protection if the seat belt is worn
correctly because:
Safety
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country-

specific differences are possible. Please Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
note that your vehicle may not be equipped occupant in the best position in relation
with all features described. This also to the airbag.
applies to safety-relevant systems and Rin a head-on collision, for example, the
functions. seat belt prevents the vehicle occupant
from being propelled towards the point
of impact and thus can reduce the risk of
Occupant safety injury.
Important safety notes Therefore, in accident situations where an
airbag is deployed, it only provides protec-
Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt tion in addition to the seat belt if the seat
force limiters and airbags, are complemen- belt is being worn correctly.
tary, coordinated restraint systems. They
reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre- G Risk of accident and injury
defined types of accident situations and If service work is not carried out correctly, the
thereby increase occupant safety. However, operating safety of your vehicle may be affec-
seat belts and airbags generally do not pro- ted. This could cause you to lose control of
tect against objects penetrating the vehicle your vehicle and cause an accident. More-
from the outside. over, the safety systems may no longer be
To ensure that the restraint systems can able to protect you or others as they are
deliver their full potential protection, make designed to do.
sure that: Always have service work carried out at a
Rthe qualified specialist workshop. The workshop
seat and head restraint are adjusted
must have the necessary specialist knowl-
properly (Y page 68).
edge and tools to carry out the work required.
Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
(Y page 36). Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
deployed (Y page 32). on safety-related systems must be carried out
Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly at a qualified specialist workshop.
(Y page 68).
Rthe restraint systems have not been modi- G Risk of injury
fied. Modifications to or work performed incor-
rectly on the following parts can result in the
i An airbag increases the protection of
restraint systems not functioning as intended:
vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. As
such they are only an additional restraint Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat
system which complements, but does not belts and their anchorage points, belt ten-
replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants sioners, belt force limiters and airbags
must wear their seat belt correctly at all Rthe wiring
times, even if the vehicle is equipped with Rnetworked electronic systems
airbags. Airbags are not deployed in all
Occupant safety 31
Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to A malfunction has occurred if:
deploy or be triggered in an accident despite Rthe + SRS warning lamp does not light
the deceleration force being sufficient to trig- up when the ignition is switched on.
ger the systems, or could be triggered unin-
Rthe engine is running and the + SRS
tentionally. For this reason, never make any
warning lamp does not go out after a few
Safety
modifications to the restraint systems.
seconds.
Therefore, you must not tamper with elec-
Rthe engine is running and the + SRS
tronic components or their software.
warning lamp lights up again.
In this case, have SRS checked immediately
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-
Introduction Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming In particular, work relevant to safety or on
into contact with the vehicle's interior in the safety-related systems must be carried out at
event of an accident. It can also reduce the a qualified specialist workshop.
effect of the forces to which occupants are
subjected during an accident. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force
SRS consists of: limiters and airbags
R+ SRS warning lamp During the first stage of a collision, the airbag
Rairbags control unit evaluates important physical
Rairbag
data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
control unit (with crash sensors)
eration, such as:
Rbelt tensioners for the front seat belts and
Rduration
the outer seat belts in the rear
Rbelt force limiters for the driver's and front- Rdirection
passenger seat Rmagnitude
Based on the evaluation of this data, the air-

SRS warning lamp bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the
belt tensioners in the first stage.
SRS functions are checked regularly when
you switch on the ignition and when the If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel-
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direc-
can be detected in good time. tion, the front airbags are also deployed.
The + SRS warning lamp in the instrument Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air-
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched bags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehi-
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds cle deceleration or acceleration in the event
after the engine is started. of a collision. When the first deployment
threshold is reached, the front airbag is filled
G Risk of injury with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk
If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed
may be activated unintentionally or may not if a second deployment threshold is exceeded
be triggered in the event of an accident with within a few milliseconds.
a high rate of vehicle deceleration. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering
thresholds are variable and are adapted to the
rate of deceleration or acceleration of the
vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature.
Z
32 Occupant safety
The triggering process must take place in Airbags

good time at the start of the collision.
Important safety notes
i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci-
dent. The different airbag systems work Airbag deployment slows down and restricts
independently of each other. the movement of the vehicle occupant.
Safety
How the airbag system works is deter- When the airbags are deployed, you will hear
mined by the severity of the accident detec- a bang and a small amount of powder may
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or also be released. Only in rare cases will the
acceleration, and the apparent type of acci- bang affect your hearing. The powder that is
dent: released generally does not constitute a
Rhead-on
health hazard. The + SRS warning lamp
collision
lights up.
Rside impact
The airbag installation locations are identified
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- by the AIRBAG symbol.
tion and the direction of the force are essen-
tially determined by: G Risk of injury
Rthe
Airbags provide additional protection; they
distribution of forces during the colli-
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
sion
Rthe collision angle
Observe the following notes to reduce the risk
of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-
deployment:
cle
RAll vehicle occupants – in particular, preg-
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
nant women – must wear their seat belt
the vehicle has collided
correctly at all times and lean back against
Factors which can only be seen and measured the backrest, which should be positioned
after a collision has occurred do not play a as close to the vertical as possible. The
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, head restraint must support the back of the
nor do they provide an indication of airbag head at about eye level.
deployment. RAlways secure children less than 1.50 m tall
The vehicle may be deformed significantly, and under 12 years of age in suitable child
e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag restraint systems.
being deployed. This is the case if only parts RAll vehicle occupants must select a seat
which are relatively easily deformed are affec-
position that is as far away from the airbag
ted and the deployment threshold is not
as possible. The driver's seat position must
reached. Conversely, airbags may be
allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
driver's chest should be as far away from
minor deformation. This is the case if, for
the centre of the driver's airbag cover as
example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-
possible.
gitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
RMove the front-passenger seat as far back
deceleration occurs as a result.
as possible. This is especially important if
you have secured a child in a child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat.
RVehicle occupants – in particular, children
– must not lean their heads into the area of
the window in which a sidebag or head/
thorax sidebag is deployed.
Occupant safety 33
RRearward-facing child restraint systems It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury
must not be fitted to the front-passenger being caused by an airbag due to the high
seat unless the front-passenger airbag has speed at which the airbag must be deployed.
been disabled. On the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled G Risk of injury
Safety
if a child restraint system with automatic Airbag functionality can only be assured if the
child seat recognition is fitted to the front- following parts are not covered and no badges
passenger seat. The 4 PASSENGER or stickers are attached to them:
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be con- Rpadded steering wheel boss
tinuously lit.
Rfront-passenger airbag cover
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle
Router side of front seat bolsters
does not have automatic child seat recog-
nition, or your rearward-facing child Rside trim next to the rear seat backrest
restraint system does not have automatic
child seat recognition, children must be G Risk of injury
secured in a child restraint system on a A small amount of smoke is released briefly
suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a when an airbag is deployed. The smoke could
forward-facing child restraint system to the cause short-term breathing difficulties in peo-
front-passenger seat, you must move the ple with asthma or other respiratory prob-
front-passenger seat as far back as possi- lems.
ble. In order to prevent breathing difficulties, you
RMake sure there are no heavy or sharp- should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe
edged objects in pockets of clothing. to do so. You can also open the window to
RDo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of allow fresh air to enter the interior. The smoke
the driver's/front-passenger airbag, partic- does not constitute a health hazard and does
ularly when the vehicle is in motion. not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle.
RDo not put your feet on the dashboard.
ROnly hold the steering wheel by the rim.
G Risk of injury
This allows the airbag to deploy fully. You The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has
could be injured if the airbag is deployed been deployed. Do not touch them as you
and you are holding the inside of the steer- could burn yourself.
ing wheel. Have the airbags replaced at a qualified spe-
RDo not lean on the doors from inside the cialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are
vehicle. not protected by the airbags in the event of
RMake sure that there are no people, ani-
another accident.
mals or objects between the vehicle occu-
pants and the area of deployment of the Front airbags
airbag. The front airbags increase protection for the
RDo not place any objects between the seat driver's and front-passenger's head and
backrest and the door. chest.
RDo not hang any hard objects, for example,
coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat
hooks.
RDo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders,
to the doors.
Z
34 Occupant safety
with sidebags instead of head/thorax side-

bags.
G Risk of injury
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that, for safety reasons, you
Safety
only use seat covers that have been approved

for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The seat covers must have a special tear seam
for head/thorax sidebags. Otherwise, the
head/thorax sidebags cannot deploy cor-
Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the rectly and would fail to provide the intended
steering wheel; front-passenger airbag ; protection in the event of an accident. Appro-
deploys in front of and above the glove com- priate seat covers can be obtained from a
partment. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
They are deployed: The head/thorax sidebags enhance the level
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of protection for the head and thorax (but not
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a the arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side
longitudinal direction of the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
Rif the system determines that airbag The rear sidebags enhance the level of pro-
deployment can offer additional protection tection for the thorax (but not the head, neck
to that provided by the seat belt or arms) of the vehicle occupants in the rear
Rif the seat belt is fastened on the side of the vehicle on which the impact
Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi- occurs.
cle
Front-passenger airbag ; is only deployed if
the front-passenger seat is occupied or if the
4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp in the centre console is not lit
(Y page 41). This means that a child
restraint system with automatic child seat
recognition has not been fitted to the front-
passenger seat or has been fitted incorrectly.
! Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. This could cause the sys- Front head/thorax sidebags : and rear side-
tem to identify the seat as being occupied. bags ; deploy next to the outer seat cush-
In the event of an accident, the restraint ion.
systems on the front-passenger side are
They are deployed:
triggered. Have restraint systems that have
been triggered replaced. Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
Head/thorax sidebags, sidebags in the of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
rear compartment tion, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of seat belt use
If your vehicle is fitted with windowbags, the
front seats of the vehicle will be equipped
Occupant safety 35
Rindependently of the front airbags seats to be moved forwards. This provides

Rindependently of the belt tensioners better head support.
G Risk of injury
Windowbags Do not secure any objects (e.g. coat hangers)
The windowbags enhance the level of protec- on the head restraint rods. Otherwise, the
Safety
tion for the head (but not chest or arms) of active head restraints may not function cor-
the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehi- rectly and could fail to provide the intended
cle on which the impact occurs. protection in the event of an accident.
The windowbags are integrated into the side
of the roof frame and deploy in the area
extending from the front door (A-pillar) to the Seat belts
rear door (C-pillar).
If your vehicle is fitted with windowbags, the
front seats of the vehicle will be equipped Seat belts are the most effective means of
with sidebags instead of head/thorax side- restraining the movement of vehicle occu-
bags. pants in the event of an accident. This
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
into contact with parts of the vehicle interior.
G Risk of injury
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or
which has not been engaged in the seat belt
buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended
protective function. Under certain circum-
stances, this could cause severe or even fatal
injuries in the event of an accident.
Make sure that all occupants – in particular,
pregnant women – wear their seat belt cor-
Windowbags : are deployed:
rectly at all times.
Ron the side on which an impact occurs RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate and must not be twisted. Therefore, avoid
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera- wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
tion, e.g. in a side impact The shoulder belt section must be routed
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger across the centre of your shoulder – on no
seat is occupied account across your neck or under your
Rindependently of the front airbags arm – and pulled tight against your upper
body. The lap belt must always pass across
your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over
Active head restraints your hip joints – not across your abdomen.
If necessary, push down the belt strap
The active head restraints increase protec- slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up
tion to the driver's and front-passenger's direction.
head and neck. In the event of a rear-end col-
RDo not route the belt strap across sharp
lision the force exerted by the driver's or
edges or fragile objects, especially if these
front-passenger's chest causes the head
are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spec-
restraints on the driver's and front-passenger
tacles, pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap
Z
36 Occupant safety
could be damaged and tear in an accident, For this reason, check regularly that the seat
and you or other vehicle occupants could belts are not damaged or dirty.
be injured. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts
ROnly one person should use each seat belt that have been subjected to a load in an acci-
at any one time. Children must never travel dent replaced at a qualified specialist work-
Safety
sitting on the lap of other occupants. It shop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop
would not be possible to restrain the child which has the necessary specialist knowledge
in the event of a sudden change in direc- and tools to carry out the work required.
tion, braking or an accident. This could Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
result in severe or even fatal injuries to the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
child and other occupants. pose.
RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
the seat belts correctly. For this reason, mends that you only use seat belts which have
secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in spe- been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
cially designed, suitable restraint systems. vehicle.
RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12
years of age cannot wear the seat belts Fastening seat belts
properly. Therefore, they should always be
secured in a suitable child restraint system
on a suitable vehicle seat. You can find
more information under "Children in the
vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Own-
er's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's
installation instructions when fitting a child
restraint system.
RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt
if the seat belt is also being used by one of
the vehicle's occupants.
G Risk of injury
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection unless the backrest is almost
vertical. Under certain circumstances, this
could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
event of an accident. an almost vertical position (Y page 68).
Before starting a journey, make sure that the X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
seat is properly adjusted and that the back- sash guide :.
rest is almost vertical.
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-
G Risk of injury tion of the seat belt across the middle of

your shoulder and the lap section across
A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that
your hips.
has been subjected to a load in an accident
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
or which has been modified no longer offers
the intended level of protection. Under certain
circumstances, this could cause severe or
even fatal injuries in the event of an accident.
Occupant safety 37
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the mechanism. This could damage the door,
appropriate height (Y page 37). the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt protective function and must be replaced.
across your body. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Safety
For more information about releasing the seat
belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
Belt warning for driver and front
passenger
seat belts" (Y page 37).
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
Belt height adjustment ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants
to fasten their seat belts. It may light up con-
You can adjust the seat belt height on the tinuously or flash. In addition, there may be a
driver's seat and the front-passenger seat. warning tone.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and
the warning tone ceases when the driver and
the front passenger have fastened their seat
belts.
For certain countries only: regardless of
whether the driver or the front passenger
have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat
belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds
after the engine is started. It then goes out if
the driver and the front passenger have fas-
tened their seat belts.
Adjust the height so that the upper part of the
seat belt is routed across the centre of your i For more information on the 7 seat
shoulder. belt warning lamp, see "Indicator and warn-
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. ing lamps in the instrument cluster, seat
The belt sash guide engages in various posi- belt" (Y page 178).
tions.
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide Rear seat belt status indicator
release :. The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. cator tells you if the rear passengers have
X Release belt sash guide release : and their seat belts fastened.
make sure that the belt sash guide has The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
engaged. cator indicates the rear seat on which the belt
is fastened.
Releasing seat belts
X Press release button ? (Y page 36) and
guide belt tongue ; back towards belt
sash guide :.
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
could be trapped in the door or in the seat
Z
38 Occupant safety
The rear-compartment seat belt status indi- The belt tensioners can only be activated
cator appears in the multifunction display for when:
around 30 seconds if: Rthe ignition is switched on.
Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approx- Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
imately 10 km/h. "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 31).
Safety
Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
their seat belts while the vehicle is in each of the three-point seat belts in the
motion. front.
Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle. The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the
You can also cancel the rear seat belt status rear compartment are triggered independ-
indicator immediately (Y page 162). ently of the lock status of the seat belts.
The following messages appear in the multi- The belt tensioners are triggered depending
function display: on the type and severity of an accident:
R7 No rear seat belt engaged Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-
R7 1 rear seat belt engaged sion if the vehicle decelerates or acceler-
R7 2 rear seat belts engaged
ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur-
ing the initial stages of the impact
R7 3 rear seat belts engaged
Rin the event of a side impact, on the side
i The status indicator for the rear-compart- opposite the impact if the vehicle deceler-
ment seat belts is only available for certain ates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direc-
countries. tion
When the belt tensioners are deployed, you
Belt tensioners, belt force limiters will hear a bang and a small amount of powder
may also be released. Only in rare cases will
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
the bang affect your hearing. The powder that
in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners.
is released generally does not constitute a
The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in health hazard. The + SRS warning lamp
an accident, pulling them close against the lights up.
body.
Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat G Risk of injury
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. If the seat belt tensioners have been trig-
Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants gered, they provide no additional protection
back towards the backrest. in the event of another accident. Therefore,
have belt tensioners which have been trig-
If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force
gered replaced at a qualified specialist work-
limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted
shop.
by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is
reduced. Comply with safety regulations when dispos-
ing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz
The front belt force limiters are synchronised
Service Centre can provide details of these
with the front airbags, which take on a part of
regulations.
the deceleration force. Thus, the force exer-
ted on the occupant is distributed over a
greater area.
Children in the vehicle 39
Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems should be fitted to the

rear seats. Children are generally better pro-
Child restraint systems tected there.
Important safety notes The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion. There-
G Risk of injury
Safety
fore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion,
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal under the child restraint system.
injury to the child in the event of a sudden Only use child restraint systems with the orig-
change in direction, braking or an accident: inal cover designed for them. Only replace
RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and under damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz
twelve years of age must always be secured covers.
in special child restraint systems on a suit- We recommend that you use the child
able vehicle seat. This is necessary restraint systems which have been recom-
because the seat belts are not designed for mended for Mercedes-Benz.
children. Vehicles with a through-loading facility in the
RDo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall rear seat backrest: do not fit a rearward-
or under twelve years of age on the front- facing child restraint system on the centre
passenger seat. Exception: the child is rear seat.
secured in a vehicle with automatic child
seat recognition on the front-passenger If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure
seat and is secured in a child restraint sys- the child using a child restraint system which
tem with automatic child seat recognition. is appropriate to the size, age and weight of
RIf you secure a forward-facing child the child and recommended for Mercedes-
restraint system to the front-passenger Benz vehicles. You should preferably fit the
seat, you must move the front-passenger restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Make
seat as far back as possible. sure that the child is secured in a child
RChildren must never travel sitting on the lap
restraint system throughout the trip.
of another occupant. Due to the forces Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
which occur in the event of a sudden the child restraint systems listed at
change of direction, heavy braking or an (Y page 49).
accident, it would not be possible to More information about correct child
restrain the child. The child could be thrown restraint systems can be obtained from any
against parts of the vehicle interior and be Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
seriously or even fatally injured. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care
products to clean child restraint systems.
G Risk of injury You can obtain information about this from
The child restraint system cannot perform its any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
protective function if it is not correctly fitted
to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be G Risk of injury
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy Do not leave children unsupervised in the
braking or sudden changes of direction. The vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
child could be seriously or even fatally injured. restraint system. They could injure them-
For this reason, when fitting a child restraint selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
system, observe the manufacturer's installa- be seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
tion instructions and the correct use of the longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
child restraint system.
Z
40 Children in the vehicle
Do not expose the child restraint system to

direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-
tem could heat up and the child could burn
herself/himself on them.
If a child opens a door, the child or other per-
Safety
sons could be injured as a result. They could

get out and injure themselves or be injured by
a passing vehicle.
G Risk of injury
Unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
increase the risk of injury for children and all restraint system
other occupants in the event of:
G Risk of injury
Ran accident If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
Ra braking manoeuvre
Ra child secured in a child restraint system
Ra sudden change of direction
on the front-passenger seat could be seri-
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the vehi- ously and even fatally injured by the front-
cle interior unless they are secured. You will passenger airbag deploying. This is espe-
find further information under "Loading guide- cially a risk if the child is in the immediate
lines" in the index. vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when
it deploys.
Child seat on the front-passenger seat Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem. Only secure a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
the rearmost position if you secure a child
in a forward-facing child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat.
The front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
recognition on the front-passenger seat
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor
ognition on the front-passenger seat,
unless a child restraint system with auto-
matic child seat recognition is fitted to the
front-passenger seat
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat,
unless the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp is lit
To make you aware of this danger, a corre-
sponding warning sticker has been affixed on
the dashboard and on both sides of the sun lights up. The front-passenger airbag is disa-
visor on the front-passenger side. bled.
Information about recommended child G Risk of injury
restraint systems is available at any If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. tor lamp does not light up when the child
Safety
restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger
Automatic child seat recognition on the airbag has not been disabled. If the front-
front-passenger seat passenger airbag deploys, the child could be
seriously or even fatally injured.
Proceed as follows:
Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat.
Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system
on a suitable rear seat.
or
Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat and
move the front-passenger seat to the rear-
If your vehicle does not have automatic child most position.
seat recognition7 on the front-passenger Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard To ensure that the automatic child seat rec-
on the front-passenger side. The sticker is ognition on the front-passenger seat func-
visible when you open the front-passenger tions/communicates correctly, never place
door. objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child
restraint system. The entire base of the child
restraint system must always rest on the seat
cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint
system cannot perform its intended protec-
tive function in the event of an accident, and
could lead to injuries.
i If the front-passenger airbag is disabled

by the automatic child seat recognition, the
following remain enabled on the front-
passenger side:
The automatic child seat recognition sensor Rthe sidebag/head/thorax sidebag
system on the front-passenger seat detects Rthe windowbag
whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat Rthe belt tensioner
with automatic child seat recognition has
been fitted there. In this case, 4
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp :
7 Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock, the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly but has no function.
It does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat.
Z
G Risk of injury restrained in the event of an accident, heavy

Do not place electronic devices on the front- braking or sudden changes of direction. The
passenger seat, e.g.: child could be seriously or even fatally injured.
For this reason, when fitting a child restraint
Rlaptops, when switched on
system, observe the manufacturer's installa-
Rmobile phones
Safety
tion instructions and the correct use of the

Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or child restraint system.
access cards For reasons of safety, only use child restraint
Signals from electronic equipment can cause systems with the ISOFIX child seat securing
interference in the automatic child seat rec- system on the rear seats.
ognition sensor system. This can lead to a We recommend that you use the ISOFIX child
system malfunction. This may cause the restraint systems that have been recommen-
4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator ded for Mercedes-Benz.
lamp to light up without there being a child
An incorrectly fitted child restraint system
seat with automatic child seat recognition fit-
could come loose and seriously or even fatally
ted, and the front-passenger front airbag will
injure the child or other vehicle occupants.
not deploy during an accident. It is also pos-
When fitting the child restraint system, always
sible that the + SRS warning lamp lights
make sure that it is engaged correctly in the
up and/or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF securing rings on both sides.
indicator lamp does not light up briefly when
you turn the key in the ignition lock to position G Risk of injury
2.
Please note that if child restraint systems, or
their retaining systems, are damaged or sub-
ISOFIX child seat securing system for jected to a load in an accident, they may not
the rear seats be able to provide their protective function.
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for This could result in serious or even fatal inju-
specially designed child restraint systems on ries to the secured child in the event of an
the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX accident, heavy braking or a sudden change
child restraint systems are fitted on the left in direction.
and right of the rear seats. For this reason, have child restraint systems
and their anchorages which have been dam-
G Risk of injury aged or subjected to a load in an accident
A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX checked immediately at a qualified specialist
child seat securing system does not provide workshop.
sufficient protection for children weighing
more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not ! When fitting the child restraint system,
secure children weighing more than 22 kg in make sure that the seat belt for the centre
a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the
child seat securing system. If the child weighs seat belt could be damaged.
more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint
system using a three-point seat belt.
G Risk of injury
The child restraint system cannot perform its
protective function if it is not correctly fitted
to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
Safety
: Securing rings X Move head restraint : upwards.
X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system. X Release rear seat backrest ; and fold it
Comply with the manufacturer's instruc- forwards.
tions when installing the ISOFIX child X Route Top Tether belt B under head
restraint system. restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
Top Tether X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
B into Top Tether anchorage ?.
G Risk of injury
Ensure that:
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is fully
locked. When the red lock verification indica- RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
tors on the left and right are no longer visible, Tether anchorage ? as shown.
the rear seat backrests are locked. If the rear RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
seat backrests are not locked, occupants
RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear
could be injured in the event of an accident,
e.g. by objects that are thrown forward from seat backrest ; and luggage compart-
the luggage compartment. ment cover = if luggage compartment
cover = is fitted.
Top Tether provides an additional connection X Swing back rear seat backrest ; until it
between the child restraint system secured engages.
with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce The red lock verification indicator is no lon-
the risk of injury even further. ger visible.
The Top Tether anchorages are located on the X Move head restraint : back down again
rear side of the rear seat backrests. slightly if necessary (Y page 71). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the cor-
rect routing of Top Tether belt B.
X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with
Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
Make sure that Top Tether belt B is tight.
Z
Problems with child seat recognition
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 4 PASSENGER A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat rec-
AIRBAG OFF indicator ognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-
Safety
lamp on the centre con- passenger airbag has therefore been disabled as desired.
sole is lit.
G Risk of injury
There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic
child seat recognition is malfunctioning.
It is also possible that the + SRS warning lamp lights up and/
or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light
up briefly when you switch the ignition on.
X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
e.g.
Rlaptop
Rmobile phone
Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still on:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Integrated child seat tems is available from any Mercedes-Benz

Service Centre.
RThe rear seat backrest in the vehicle must
G Risk of injury be securely locked in position.
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
injury to the child in the event of a sudden The child seats are integrated into the right
change in direction, braking or an accident: and left-hand rear seat cushions. They comply
RDo
with the legal requirements of ECE
not modify the integrated child seat.
Regulation 44.03.
RWhen the child seat is occupied, the head
Mercedes-Benz recommends the integrated
restraint must be set correctly; adjust the
child seat for children from approximately
head restraint to a position at which the
two to twelve years or with a body weight of
back of the child's head is supported by the
12.5 kg to 36 kg.
centre of the head restraint at about eye
level. For children between approximately two and
RReplace an integrated child seat that has
four years of age or weighing between
approximately 12.5 kg and 22 kg, you must
been damaged or subjected to a heavy load
also use an ICS padded play table which has
as the result of an accident.
been specially approved for the integrated
RObserve that children under two years of
child seat (Y page 45).
age or children weighing less than 12.5 kg
require a different child restraint system.
Information about other child restraint sys-
Ris routed as low as possible across the pel-

vic area, in front of the hips
Ris tightened across the lap by pulling
upwards on the shoulder section of the seat
belt
Safety
Ris tight and is routed across the centre of
the child's shoulder
Ris not twisted and does not pass across the
child's neck or under the child's arm
X Adjust the head restraint if necessary
(Y page 71).
Folding out the child seat
X Press release handle :. Folding in the child seat
The integrated child seat folds upwards.
X Push the integrated child seat back to the
stop so that it engages.
Fastening a child's seat belt

G Risk of injury
injury to the child in the event of a sudden
change in direction, braking or an accident:
RThe shoulder section of the seat belt must
be routed across the centre of the child's X Press release handle :.
shoulder – never across the child's neck –
and must fit snugly against the child's X Push the integrated child seat back into the
chest. The lap section of the seat belt must seat until it engages.
be routed across the child's pelvis – not
across the abdomen – and pulled tight Padded table for the integrated child
against the child's body. Retighten the belt seat
strap if necessary.
RNever secure more than one child at a time Important safety notes
in the child restraint system. For children between approximately two and
RThe seat belt must be routed through the four years of age or weighing between
hook. approximately 12.5 kg and 22 kg, you also
need an ICS padded play table which has
RThe belt strap must not be trapped or twis-
been specially approved for the integrated
ted, nor rub against any sharp edges.
child seat.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia You can obtain the approved ICS padded play
reel. table with ECE approval number 03301101
X Guide the lower lap section of the seat belt
from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre under
through hook ;. the order number B6 687 0096.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
You must not use the integrated child seat
with ICS padded play table directly attached
buckle.
to a baby car seat on which a body weight of
X Make sure that the seat belt:
up to 10 kg is permissible.
Z
G Risk of injury Rwhen the child seat is occupied, adjust the

If the ICS padded play table is not installed head restraint to a position at which the
and used correctly on the integrated child back of the child's head is supported by the
seat, it cannot provide the intended protec- centre of the head restraint at about eye
tion. It would then not be possible to restrain level.
Safety
the child in the event of an accident, sudden Rreplace a damaged ICS padded play table
braking or abrupt change in direction and this or one that has been subjected to a load in
could result in serious or even fatal injury to an accident.
the child. For this reason, observe the follow- Rbe aware that children under two years of
ing description when fitting the ICS padded age or children weighing less than 12.5 kg
play table: require a different child restraint system.
The ICS padded play table is only suitable for Information about other child restraint sys-
use together with the folded out integrated tems is available from any Mercedes-Benz
child seat. Service Centre.
On the rear seats, only use the ICS padded
play table which is recommended for ! Make sure that the ICS padded play table
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. is not trapped or damaged, for example
when you:
An incorrectly fitted ICS padded play table
could come loose and seriously or even fatally Rclose the doors
injure the child or other vehicle occupants. Radjust the seat
After fitting the ICS padded play table, make Rstore the ICS padded play table or trans-
sure that it is secured correctly. port heavy objects
G Risk of injury
Do not modify the ICS padded play table, inte-
grated child seat or seat belts. The ICS pad-
ded play table must not be used without a
cover. The cover must not be removed from
the ICS padded play table or replaced with a
cover from another manufacturer. Otherwise,
the official approval is invalidated and the
padded play table's protective function could
be restricted.
Do not subject the ICS padded play table to
unnecessary heat or expose it to direct sun-
light. Parts of the ICS padded play table could
heat up and the child could burn itself on
them.
G Risk of injury Fitting the ICS padded play table

X Fold out integrated child seat
injury to the child in the event of a sudden B(Y page 44).
change in direction, braking or an accident: X Place the child on integrated child seat B.
Robserve the following description when fit-
ting the ICS padded play table.
Rdo not modify the ICS padded play table.
X Fold both legs A and C down. X Fold in both legs A and C.

X Place ICS padded play table ; over inte-
grated child seat B.
G Risk of injury
Safety
Make sure that:
Rthe belt is routed as described below.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Rthe ICS padded play table is close to the
child's body.
Rthe seat belt is routed through the hook.
Rthe belt strap is not trapped or twisted and
does not rub against any sharp edges.
Otherwise, it may not be possible to restrain
the child in the event of an accident, sudden
braking or abrupt change in direction and this
could result in serious or even fatal injury to
the child.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia

reel.
X Guide the lower section of the seat belt
through hook ?.
X Attach the lower and upper sections of the
belt in left seat belt guide point =.
X Guide both sections of the belt to right seat
belt guide point = and attach.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
X Slide ICS padded play table ; close to the
child's body.
X Pull both parts of the belt tight. Make sure
that the seat belt is not twisted.
X Adjust head restraint : (Y page 71).
Storing the ICS padded play table

G Risk of injury
The ICS padded play table must be secured in
the vehicle correctly or stowed securely in the
luggage compartment. It could otherwise
become loose in the event of an accident,
sudden braking or abrupt change in direction
and could injure vehicle occupants or cause
damage to the vehicle.
Z
Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems
Weight categories and ages Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0+: up to 13 kg

up to approximately 9 up to approximately
months 18 months
Safety
Child restraint system on the Vehicles with automatic Vehicles with automatic
front-passenger seat child seat recognition on the child seat recognition on
front-passenger seat: as the front-passenger seat:
recommended8 as recommended8
Child restraint system on the Universal or as recommen- Universal or as recommen-
left-hand and right-hand rear ded ded
seats
centre rear seat ded ded
Weight categories and ages Group I: 9 to 18 kg Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg

between approximately 8 between approximately
months and 4 years 3.5 and 12 years
Child restraint system on the Universal9 or as recommen- Universal9 or as recom-
front-passenger seat ded mended
left-hand and right-hand rear ded ded
seats
centre rear seat ded ded
"Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label.
Approval label on the child restraint system (example)
8 Only use child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition.
9 Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost and highest position.
Recommended child restraint systems
Weight categories and ages Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0+: up to 13 kg

up to approximately 9 up to approximately
months 18 months
Safety
Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer
Type BABY SAFE PLUS10 BABY SAFE PLUS10
Approval number E1 03 301146 E1 03 301146
E1 04 301146 E1 04 301146
Order number A 000 970 10 00 A 000 970 10 00
Automatic child seat recognition Yes Yes
Type BABY SAFE ISOFIX PLUS BABY SAFE ISOFIX PLUS
E1 04 301146 E1 04 301146
Order number B6 6 86 8224 B6 6 86 8224
Automatic child seat recognition No11 No11
Weight categories and ages Group I: 9 to 18 kg Group II/III: 15 to

between approx- 36 kg
imately 8 months and 4 between approx-
years imately 3.5 and 12
years
Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer
Type DUO PLUS12 KID12
E1 04 301133 E1 04 301148
Order number A 000 970 11 00 A 000 970 12 00
Automatic child seat recognition Yes Yes
10 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and highest position.

11 Thechild restraint system may only be fitted to the left-hand or right-hand rear seat.
12 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and highest position.
Z
Weight categories and ages Group I: 9 to 18 kg Group II/III: 15 to

between approx- 36 kg
imately 8 months and 4 between approx-
years imately 3.5 and 12
years
Safety
Order number A 000 970 16 00 A 000 970 17 00

Automatic child seat recognition No13 No13
Child-proof locks vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened

from the outside.
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear
doors and the override switch for the rear
windows when children are travelling in the
vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open
doors or side windows while the vehicle is in
motion and injure themselves or others.
G Risk of injury
Do not leave children unsupervised in the X To activate: press the child-proof lock
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
restraint system. They could injure them-
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
be seriously or even fatally injured by pro- working properly.
longed exposure to extreme heat or cold. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
Do not expose the child restraint system to lever up in the direction of arrow :.
direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-
tem could heat up and the child could burn Override feature for the rear side win-
herself/himself on them. dows
If a child opens a door, the child or other per-
sons could be injured as a result. They could
get out and injure themselves or be injured by
a passing vehicle.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with the
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
13 If you are using a child restraint system without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger
seat to its rearmost and uppermost position.
Driving safety systems 51
X To activate/deactivate: press switch :. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Switch : is pushed in or extended. If the
switch has engaged, operation of the rear Important safety guidelines
side windows is disabled. Operation is then G Risk of accident
only possible using the switches in the driv-
Do not depress the brake pedal several times
er's door.
Safety
in quick succession (pumping). Pumping the
brake pedal reduces the braking effect. You
might otherwise not be able to stop the vehi-
Driving safety systems cle in time and could cause an accident.
Driving safety systems overview Depress the brake pedal firmly and smoothly.
In this section, you will find information about ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
the following driving safety systems: that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
RBAS (Brake Assist System) cle when braking.
RAdaptive brake lamps ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
upwards, regardless of road-surface condi-
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
Rsteering assistant STEER CONTROL
when you only brake gently.
Braking
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
G Risk of accident a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The risk of an accident is significantly X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
increased by driving too fast. This is particu- brake pedal with force until the braking sit-
larly the case when cornering as well as on uation is over.
wet or slippery roads or when driving too close
X To make a full brake application:
to the vehicle in front.
depress the brake pedal with full force.
The driving safety systems described in this
section can neither reduce this risk nor over- G Risk of accident
ride the laws of physics. If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
For this reason, always adapt your driving braking. This limits the steerability of the vehi-
style to the prevailing road and weather con- cle when braking and the braking distance
ditions. Maintain sufficient distance from may increase.
other road users and objects on the road. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction,
then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There
i In wintry driving conditions, always use is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in
winter tyres (M+S tyres) and if necessary, certain situations.
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
You should always adapt your driving style to
ing safety systems described in this section
suit the prevailing road and weather condi-
work as effectively as possible.
tions.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-

tion of hazardous road conditions and func-
tions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
Z
52 Driving safety systems
BAS (Brake Assist) or more wheels are braked to stabilise the

vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also
BAS operates in emergency braking situa- modified to keep the vehicle on the desired
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
course within physical limits. ESP® assists
BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
the driver when pulling away on wet or slip-
thus shortening the stopping distance.
pery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehi-
Safety
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until cle during braking.
the emergency braking situation is over.
If ESP® intervenes, the d warning lamp
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
flashes in the instrument cluster.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. G Risk of accident
If the d warning lamp in the instrument
G Risk of accident cluster flashes, proceed as follows:
If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system
Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
remains available with full brake boosting
effect. However, braking force is not auto- necessary when pulling away.
matically increased in emergency braking sit- Radapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
uations and the stopping distance may ing road and weather conditions.
increase. Otherwise, the vehicle could go into a skid.
ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if
you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the
Adaptive brake lamps laws of physics.
i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in
! Switch the ignition off when:
certain countries.
Rthe parking brake is being tested using a
If you brake sharply from a speed of more
dynamometer
than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS,
Rthe vehicle is being towed with the rear
the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way,
traffic travelling behind you is warned in an axle raised
even more noticeable manner. Application of the brakes by ESP® could
If you brake sharply from a speed of more otherwise destroy the brake system on the
than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn- front axle.
ing lamps are activated automatically. If the i Only use wheels with the recommended
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function
light up continuously. The hazard warning properly.
lamps switch off automatically if you travel
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off
the hazard warning lamps using the hazard steering assistant STEER CONTROL
warning switch button (Y page 81).
The steering assistant STEER CONTROL helps
you by transmitting a noticeable steering
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) force to the steering wheel in the direction
required for vehicle stabilisation.
ESP® monitors the driving stability and the
traction. Traction is the power transmission
between the tyres and the road surface.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
Anti-theft systems 53
This steering assistance is provided in partic-

ular if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake
Safety
Rthe vehicle starts to skid
You have control over the steering at all

times.
G Risk of accident
If there is an ESP® malfunction, you will not X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key.
receive any steering assistance from the
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
STEER CONTROL. The steering continues to
tem is primed after approximately 15 sec-
function with power assistance.
onds.
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the
key.
Anti-theft systems
X To stop the alarm: insert the key into the
Immobiliser ignition lock.
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from The alarm is switched off.
being started without the correct key. or
X To activate: remove the key from the igni- X Press the % or & button on the key.
tion lock. The alarm is switched off.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
i The immobiliser is always deactivated Tow-away protection and interior

when you start the engine. motion sensor
When tow-away protection and the interior
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) motion sensor have been primed, a visual and
audible alarm is triggered. This is the case
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the when:
alarm system is primed and you open: Rmovement is detected in the vehicle inte-
Ra door rior, e.g. if someone reaches into the vehi-
Rthe vehicle with the emergency key ele- cle interior.
ment Rthe inclination of your vehicle changes, e.g.
Rthe tailgate if one end of your vehicle is raised.
Rthe bonnet Priming tow-away protection and the inte-
The alarm is not switched off, even if you rior motion sensor
close the open door that has triggered it, for X Make sure that:
example.
Z
54 Anti-theft systems
Rtheside windows are closed. Deactivating tow-away protection and

Rthepanorama louvred sliding sunroof is the interior motion sensor
closed. X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-
ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab
Safety
handles on the roof trim.

This will prevent false alarms.
X Lock the vehicle using the key.
Tow-away protection and the interior
motion sensor are primed after approx-
imately 30 seconds.
Deactivating tow-away protection and
the interior motion sensor
X Unlock the vehicle using the key. X Press button :.
motion sensor deactivate automatically. Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly.
X Lock the vehicle using the key.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away
protection and the interior motion sensor if
motion sensor remain deactivated until
your vehicle:
Rthe vehicle is unlocked again.
Ris being transported or towed Ra door is opened and closed again.
Ris being loaded, for example onto a ferry or
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
a car transporter
Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. split-
level garages
Ris locked while persons or animals remain
inside
Ris locked while the side windows remain
open
Ris locked while the panorama louvred slid-
ing sunroof remains open
55

Key ....................................................... 56
Doors .................................................... 59
Luggage compartment ....................... 61
Side windows ...................................... 62
Sliding sunroof .................................... 64
Opening and closing

56 Key
Vehicle equipment
i This Owner's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of publi-
specific differences are possible. Please
note that your vehicle may not be equipped
Opening and closing
with all features described. This also

applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions.
: & To lock the vehicle
; % To unlock the vehicle
Key When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.
When locking, they flash three times.
Key functions
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
Locking and unlocking centrally ton.
The key centrally locks/unlocks: If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
Rthe doors imately 40 seconds after unlocking:
Rthe tailgate Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rthe fuel filler flap Rthe anti-theft system is primed again.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
G Risk of accident
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any Changing the settings of the locking
time, even if it has been locked
system
Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been You can change the setting of the locking
left in the vehicle system in such a way that only the driver's
Rrelease the parking brake door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This
is useful if you frequently travel on your own.
They could thereby endanger themselves and
others. Never leave children unsupervised in X To change the setting: press and hold down
the vehicle. Always take the key with you the % and & buttons simultaneously
when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only for approximately six seconds until battery
leaving it for a short time. check lamp (Y page 57) flashes twice.
The key now functions as follows:
X To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
Key 57
Restoring the factory settings Battery of the key

X Press the % and & buttons simulta- Important safety notes
neously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice. It is advisable to have batteries replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Emergency key element G Risk of poisoning
Opening and closing

Batteries are toxic and contain caustic sub-
General notes
stances. For this reason, keep batteries out of
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the reach of children.
the key, use the emergency key element. If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctor
If you use the emergency key element to immediately.
unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-
theft alarm system will be triggered H Environmental note
(Y page 53). Batteries contain pollutants.
There are several ways to turn off the alarm: It is against the law to dis-
X Press the % or & button on the key. pose of them with the house-
hold rubbish. They must be
or
collected separately and
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
recycled in an environmen-
If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency tally responsible manner.
key element, the fuel filler flap will not be Dispose of batteries in an
unlocked automatically. environmentally responsible
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the manner. Take discharged
key in the ignition lock. batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service
Removing the emergency key element
Centre, or to a special col-
lection point for old batter-
ies.
Checking the battery
X Push release catch : in the direction of

the arrow and at the same time, remove
emergency key element ; from the key.
Z
58 Key
X Press the & or % button. X Remove battery tray cover :.

The battery in the key is functional if battery X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm
check lamp : lights up briefly. until battery = falls out.
If battery check lamp : does not light up X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
briefly during the test, the key battery is dis- minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
charged. to do so.
X Change the battery (Y page 58). X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
Opening and closing
i If the key battery is being checked within contamination.

signal range of the vehicle, pressing the X Insert the front tabs of battery tray
& or % button unlocks or locks the cover : and then press to close it.
vehicle correspondingly.
X Insert the emergency key element into the
key.
Changing the battery
X Check the function of all key buttons on the
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. vehicle.
X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 57).
X Press emergency key element ; into the

opening in the key in the direction of the
arrow until battery tray cover : opens.
When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
Doors 59
Problems with the key

You cannot lock or The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the key. function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the %/& button.
Opening and closing

If this does not work:
X Check the key battery and replace it if necessary (Y page 58).
X Lock (Y page 60) or unlock (Y page 61) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.
The key is faulty.

X Lock (Y page 60) or unlock (Y page 61) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
gency key element. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The engine cannot be The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

started using the key. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing
this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
Doors when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only

leaving it for a short time.
G Risk of accident
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Unlocking and opening the doors
they could: from the inside
Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any You can open a door from inside the vehicle
time, even if it has been locked even if it has been locked. You can only open
Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they
left in the vehicle are not secured by the child-proof locks
Rrelease the parking brake (Y page 50).
They could thereby endanger themselves and
others. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle. Always take the key with you
Z
60 Doors
Automatic locking feature

The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels begin
to turn. Therefore, there is a risk of being
locked out when the vehicle is being pushed,
towed or tested on a dynamometer.
You can switch the automatic locking func-
Opening and closing
tion on and off using the on-board computer

(Y page 158).
X Pull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob : pops Unlocking the driver's door (emer-
up. The door is unlocked and can be gency key element)
opened. If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the key, use the emergency key element.
If you use the emergency key element to
Locking and unlocking the vehicle unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-
from the inside theft alarm system will be triggered
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle (Y page 53).
from the inside. This feature may be useful if, X Take the emergency key element out of the
for example, you wish to unlock the front- key (Y page 57).
passenger door from the inside or lock the X Insert the emergency key element into the
vehicle before you pull away. lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
The central locking/unlocking button does
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally
from the inside if the vehicle has been
locked with the key.
X Firmly turn the emergency key element

anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position
1 and hold it in this position.
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
emergency key element clockwise.
X To lock: press button :. X Pull the door handle quickly.
X To unlock: press button ;. The locking knob pops up.
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the emergency key element back and
remove it.
Luggage compartment 61
X Pull the door handle again. fore, make sure that the tailgate is always
X Insert the emergency key element into the closed when the engine is running.
key.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
Locking the vehicle that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
i You will find details of the tailgate opening
Opening and closing

key, you can lock it by taking the following
steps. If the vehicle central locking is mal- dimensions in the Technical data section
functioning, you cannot lock the tailgate. (Y page 259).
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
door on the front-passenger side and the
Opening/closing from the outside
tailgate.
X Open the driver’s door and the rear door on Opening
the driver’s side. X Press the % button on the key.
X Press the locking button on the driver’s
door (Y page 60).
The locking knobs in the front-passenger
door and in the rear doors drop down.
X Press down the locking knobs in the front-
passenger and rear doors manually, if nec-
essary.
X Close the driver's door from the outside.
X Press down the locking knob of the driver's
door by reaching in through the open rear
door.
i Make sure that you have the key on your X Pull handle :.
person and that it has not been left in the X Raise the tailgate.
vehicle.
X Close the rear door on the driver’s side. Closing
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked. G Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
as you close the tailgate.
Luggage compartment
Do not leave the key in the luggage compart-
ment. You could otherwise lock yourself out.
G Risk of poisoning
If the engine is running and the tailgate is
open, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior. This could result in poisoning. There-
Z
62 Side windows
X Pull the tailgate down using recess :. If children open a door, they could:
X Push the tailgate closed from outside the Rseriously or even fatally injure other people
vehicle. Rget out of the vehicle and injure them-
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the
selves, or be seriously or even fatally
& button on the key. injured by a passing vehicle
Activate the child-proof locks/override fea-
ture if children are travelling in the vehicle.
Side windows
Opening and closing
They could otherwise open doors or side win-

dows while the vehicle is in motion and
thereby injure themselves or others.
G Risk of injury
between the side window and the door frame Opening and closing the side win-
when a side window is opened. Do not touch dows
or lean against the side window during the
opening procedure. You could become trap-
ped between the side window and the door
frame as the side window moves down. If
there is a risk of becoming trapped, release
the switch or pull the switch upwards to close
the side window again.
G Risk of injury
as you close a side window. If there is a risk
of becoming trapped, release the switch or : Front left
press it again to open the side window again. ; Front right
= Rear right
G Risk of injury
? Rear left
Children may injure themselves if they open
or close the side windows. The switches for all side windows are located
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi- on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
cle. Always take the key with you when leaving each door for the corresponding side window.
the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
a short time. lock.
X To open: press the corresponding switch.
G Risk of injury X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the i If you press the switch beyond the point
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child of resistance, an automatic opening/clos-
restraint system. The children could: ing process is started in the corresponding
Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts direction. You can stop automatic opera-
of the vehicle tion by pressing again.
Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by pro- i You can continue to operate the side win-
longed exposure to extremely high or dows after you switch off the engine. This
extremely low temperatures
Side windows 63
function remains active for five minutes or Rrelease the & button.
until one of the front doors is opened. Rpress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the panorama louvred
sliding sunroof open again.
Convenience opening feature
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start i The key must be close to the driver's door
driving. To do this, you can use the key to handle.
simultaneously: Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
Opening and closing

X
Runlock the vehicle handle.
Ropen the side windows X Lock the vehicle by pressing the & but-
Ropen the panorama louvred sliding sunroof ton.
or move it to the ventilation position X Press and hold the & button until the
i The convenience opening feature can side windows and the panorama louvred
sliding sunroof are fully closed.
only be operated using the key. The key
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
must be close to the driver's door handle.
panorama louvred sliding sunroof are
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door closed.
handle.
X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows are in the desired position. Resetting the side windows
The panorama louvred sliding sunroof
stops in the ventilation position. You must reset each side window if:
X To open the panorama louvred sliding Rthe battery has been disconnected or has
sunroof: press and hold the % button become discharged.
again until the panorama louvred sliding Rthe side windows open again slightly after
sunroof has reached the desired position. being closed fully.
Rthe side window can no longer be fully
X To interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button. opened or closed.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Convenience closing feature X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
pletely closed. (Y page 62)
neously:
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Rclose the side windows
Rclose the panorama louvred sliding sunroof If the side window opens again slightly:
X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
G Risk of injury on the door control panel until the side win-
When using the convenience closing feature, dow is completely closed (Y page 62).
make sure that nobody can become trapped. X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrap-
X If the corresponding side window remains
ment:
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Z
64 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the side windows G Risk of injury

Problem: a side window cannot be closed Make sure that nobody can become trapped
because objects are trapped between the when closing the sliding sunroof. If there is a
side window and the door frame. risk of entrapment, release the switch and
push it briefly in any direction to stop the slid-
X Remove the objects. ing sunroof.
X Close the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed G Risk of injury
Opening and closing
because objects in the guide rail are pre- Children could injure themselves if they oper-
venting the window from being raised. ate the sliding sunroof.
X Remove the objects. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
X Close the side window.
the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
Problem: a side window cannot be closed, a short time.
and you cannot see the cause.
G Risk of injury G Risk of injury
Closing the side windows with increased force The glass in the fixed panorama sunroof could
or without the anti-entrapment feature could break in an accident.
lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a
that nobody can become trapped when clos- risk that you could be thrown through the
ing the side windows. opening in the event of the vehicle overturn-
ing. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to
If a side window is obstructed during closing reduce the risk of injuries.
and reopens again slightly:
! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull
if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal-
the corresponding switch again until the
functions may occur.
side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased Do not allow anything to protrude from the
force. sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
If a side window is obstructed again during
closing and reopens again slightly: i Resonance noises can occur in addition
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
the corresponding switch again until the pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
side window has closed. Change the position of the sliding sunroof
The side window is closed without the anti- or open a side window slightly to reduce or
entrapment feature. eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama louvred sliding
sunroof.
Sliding sunroof 65
Operating the panorama louvred slid- Opening and closing the roller sunblind
ing sunroof
Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Roller sunblind : for the panorama louvred
sliding sunroof or the fixed panorama roof
shields the vehicle interior from sunlight.
: To open It is possible to open and close the roller sun-
blind by hand in the direction of the arrow
; To close
regardless of the position of the panorama
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition louvred sliding sunroof.
lock.
X To open: press and hold the 2 switch
in the direction of arrow :.
stops in the ventilation position.
X Press the 2 switch in the direction of
arrow : again and hold until the desired
position has been reached.
X To close: press the 2 switch in the
direction of arrow ; and hold until the
desired position has been reached or the
panorama louvred sliding sunroof is fully
closed.
Ventilation position
You can raise the rear of the front louvre of
the panorama louvred sliding sunroof to pro-
vide ventilation.
lock.
X Press the 2 switch in the direction of
arrow : and hold.
stops in the ventilation position.
Z
66
67

Correct driver's seat position ............ 68
Seats .................................................... 69
Steering wheel .................................... 73
Mirrors ................................................. 74
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

68 Correct driver's seat position
Vehicle equipment Ryou have moved the backrest to an

almost vertical position.
i This Owner's Manual describes all models Ryou have set the seat angle so that your
and all standard and optional equipment of thighs are gently supported.
your vehicle available at the time of publi- Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country- X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
specific differences are possible. Please ted properly (Y page 70).
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by
functions.
the centre of the head restraint.

Observe the safety notes when adjusting the
Correct driver's seat position steering wheel (Y page 73).
X Check whether steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel man-
ually(Y page 73)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.
Observe the notes on seat belts.
(Y page 35)
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 36).
The seat belt should:
Rfit snugly across your body
Rbe routed across the middle of your
Observe the safety notes when adjusting the
seats (Y page 69). shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the
X Check whether you have adjusted seat =
hip joints
properly.
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
Manual seat adjustment (Y page 70)
ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 74)
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 70) in such a way that you have a good view of
When adjusting the seat, make sure that: road and traffic conditions.
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air-
bag as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-
tion.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Seats 69
Seats accident. Never drive if the head restraints are

not engaged and set correctly.
G Risk of injury G Risk of injury
The seats can be adjusted when the key is A seat belt can only offer its intended degree
removed and the door is open. For this rea- of protection when the backrest is almost ver-
son, children should never be left unsuper- tical and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid
vised in the vehicle. They could adjust the seat positions that do not allow the seat belt
seats and become trapped. to be routed correctly. Adjust the backrest so
that it is as upright as possible. Never travel

G Risk of accident with the backrest reclined too far backwards.
You could otherwise be seriously or even
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle
fatally injured in the event of an accident or
is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted
sudden braking.
from the road and traffic conditions and you
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
the seat moving. This could cause an acci-
heating, observe the following information:
dent.
Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
G Risk of injury liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
others could be trapped and thereby injured.
Children in particular could unintentionally switch on the seat heating. The seat
press the buttons to electrically adjust the heating should also not to be used to dry
seats and become trapped. the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
Take care that:
see the "Interior care" section.
Rwhile moving the seats, your hands do not
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
get under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system. seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
Rchildren in the vehicle do not slide their
The seats should only be occupied by
hands under the levers.
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
G Risk of injury
not cover the seats with insulating mate-
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-
when adjusting the seats.
ers, child seats or booster seats.
Observe the notes on airbags.
! When you move the seats, make sure that
Secure children as recommended; see the
there are no objects in the footwell or
"Children in the vehicle" section.
behind the seats. Otherwise, you could
damage the seats and the objects.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that the back of your head is sup- i The head restraints in the front and rear
ported at eye level by the central area of the seats can be removed.
head restraint. If your head is not supported Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
correctly by the head restraint, you could suf- Centre for more information.
fer a severe neck injury in the event of an
Z
70 Seats
i Related topics: Adjusting the seat electrically

RLuggage compartment enlargement
(removing/folding the rear bench seat
forwards)
Adjusting the seat manually

: Head restraint height

; Backrest angle
= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
? Seat cushion angle
A Seat height
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 2 in the ignition lock or that the respective
X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards door is open.
or backwards.
X Release lever : again.
Adjusting the head restraints
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position. Adjusting the head restraints manually
Backrest angle Adjusting the head restraint height
X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.

X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards.
Seat height
X Pull handle = upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.
Seat cushion angle

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly
desired position.
supported.
X To lower: press release catch : in the
X Turn handwheel ; forwards or backwards.
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
Seats 71
Adjusting the angle of the head restraints Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
angle
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
close as possible to your head.
You can only adjust the two outer head
restraints.

X Push or pull the upper edge of the head
restraint in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the head restraints electri-

cally
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
X Pull the bottom of the head restraint for-
wards or push it backwards.
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 70) up or down in the direction of Fitting/removing the rear seat head
the arrow. restraints
G Risk of injury
Rear seat head restraints
Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint which have the head restraints installed. This
height reduces the risk of injury to the passengers in
the rear in the event of an accident.
If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is nec-

essary to press release catch :. X Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards in
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the order to remove the head restraint
desired position. (Y page 191).
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the the stop.
desired position. X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
Z
72 Seats
X To refit: insert the head restraint so that

the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
Adjusting the lumbar support

You can adjust the contour of the front seats
so as to provide optimum support for your
back. : To adjust the backrest contour in the lum-

bar region
; To adjust the backrest contour in the
upper back region
= To adjust the backrest side bolsters
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Set the desired position with the relevant
button.
Switching the seat heating on/off

X Move adjustment lever : in the direction
of the arrow until the desired backrest con- Switching on/off
tour is achieved.
G Risk of injury
Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level
Adjusting the multicontour backrest 3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.
The health of passengers that have limited
You can adjust the contour of the front seats temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
individually so as to provide optimum support react to excessively high temperatures may
for your back. be affected or they may even suffer burn-like
injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating
level 3 repeatedly.
The three red indicator lamps in the button

indicate the heating level you have selected.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Steering wheel 73
Steering wheel
G Risk of accident
Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehi-
cle is stationary and do not pull away until the
steering wheel adjustment mechanism is
locked in position. You might otherwise drive
without the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism being locked in position. As a result,

Driver's and front-passenger seat you could be distracted from road and traffic
conditions by an unintentional movement of
The system automatically switches down
the steering wheel and thereby cause an acci-
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately five
dent.
minutes.
However, the steerability of the vehicle is not
The system automatically switches down
affected.
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
Adjusting the steering wheel
level 1.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Problems with the seat heating

If one or all of the indicator lamps in the seat : Release handle
heating button are flashing, the seat heating ; To adjust the steering wheel height
has switched off automatically. The vehicle's
= To adjust the steering wheel position
electrical system voltage is too low because
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
too many electrical consumers are switched
on. X Pull release handle : out completely.
X Switch off electrical consumers which you The steering column is unlocked.
do not need, such as the rear window heat- X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
ing or interior lighting. position.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the X Push release handle : in completely until
seat heating will switch back on automati- it engages fully.
cally. The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction.
Z
74 Mirrors
Mirrors appear. You could misjudge the distance from

vehicles driving behind and cause an acci-
Rear-view mirror dent, e.g. when changing lane. For this rea-
Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) son, make sure of the actual distance from the
vehicle driving behind by glancing over your
shoulder.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger

field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
if the rear window heating is switched on and
the outside temperature is low.
X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle

switch : forwards or back.
Automatic anti-dazzle rear-view mirror

The rear-view mirror automatically goes into
anti-dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on
and incident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.
The rear-view mirror does not go into anti-
X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior
dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if
the interior lighting is switched on. mirror or button = for the left-hand exte-
rior mirror.
G Risk of accident The indicator lamp in the corresponding
If incident light from headlamps is prevented button lights up in red.
from striking the sensor in the rear-view mir- The indicator lamp goes out again after
ror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in some time. You can adjust the selected
the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-dazzle mirror using adjustment button : as long
function will not operate.
as the indicator lamp is lit.
Incident light could then dazzle you. This may X Press adjustment button : up, down, to
distract you from the traffic conditions, and
the right or to the left until the exterior mir-
as a result, you may cause an accident. In this
ror is set to a position that provides you
case, adjust the rear-view mirror manually.
with a good overview of traffic conditions.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G Risk of accident
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
image. Objects are actually closer than they
Mirrors 75
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out i The mirrors do not fold out if they have
electrically been folded in manually.
Exterior mirror out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-

rior mirrors: press the mirror-folding but-
ton (Y page 75) repeatedly until you hear
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or the mirror engage in position.
2 in the ignition lock. The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
X Briefly press button :.
(Y page 74).
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while the vehicle is
in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate.
Setting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-
rors when locking" function in the on-board
computer (Y page 159).
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
the ignition lock.
X Briefly press button :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 159):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
side.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
Z
76
77

Exterior lighting .................................. 78
Interior lighting ................................... 82
Changing bulbs ................................... 83
Windscreen wipers ............................. 88
Lights and windscreen wipers

78 Exterior lighting
Vehicle equipment Light switch
i This Owner's Manual describes all models Operation

functions.
Exterior lighting
1W Left-hand parking lamps
Important safety notes 2X Right-hand parking lamps
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- 3$ Lights off/daytime driving lights
mends that you drive with the lights switched 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime
on even during the daytime. In some coun- driving lights
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
5T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli-
ment lighting
gations. In these countries, constant head-
lamp mode is automatically switched on 6L Dipped-beam/main-beam head-
when the engine is started. lamps
7R Vehicles without foglamps: rear fog-
lamp
Notes on driving abroad 7N Vehicles with foglamps: front fog-
lamp
Convert to symmetrical dipped beam
8R Vehicles with foglamps: rear foglamp
when driving abroad: switch the headlamps
to symmetrical dipped beam in countries in The turn signals, main-beam headlamps and
which traffic drives on the opposite side of the the headlamp flasher are operated using the
road to the country where the vehicle is reg- combination switch (Y page 80).
istered. This prevents glare to oncoming traf-
! Switch off the side lamps and parking
fic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as
lamp when you leave the vehicle. This pre-
large an area of the edge of the carriageway.
vents the battery from discharging.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/
Service Centre, as close to the border as pos- parking lamps) switches off automatically if
sible before driving in these countries. you:
Convert to asymmetrical dipped beam Rremove the key from the ignition lock
after returning: have the headlamps conver- Ropen the driver's door with the key in posi-
ted back to asymmetrical dipped beam at a tion 0
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, as soon as vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
possible after crossing the border and return-
ing to the original country.
Exterior lighting 79
X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã. X To switch on automatic headlamp

or mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
light switch in to the stop. side lamps are switched on or off automat-
ically depending on the brightness of the
ambient light.
Dipped-beam headlamps
With the engine running: depending on the
X To switch on the dipped-beam head- brightness of the ambient light, the dipped-
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to beam headlamps are switched on or off
position 2 or start the engine. automatically.
X Turn the light switch to L. When the dipped-beam headlamps are
The L indicator lamp in the instrument switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
cluster lights up. instrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the dipped-beam head-
lamps: turn the light switch to $. Foglamps and rear foglamp
Front foglamps
Daytime driving lights
G Risk of accident
You can activate or deactivate the daytime
If you suspect that driving conditions will be
driving lights function using the on-board
foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
computer (Y page 157).
start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle
X Daytime driving lights: activate the day-
may not be visible and you could endanger
time driving lights function using the on- yourself and others.
board computer.
X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã. X To switch on the front foglamps: turn the
When the engine is on: the dipped-beam key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start
headlamps are switched on. the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or T. If the
Automatic headlamps light switch is set to Ã, you cannot

switch on the foglamps.
G Risk of accident X Pull the light switch out to the first detent.
If the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped- The green N indicator lamp on the light
beam headlamps will not come on automati- switch lights up.
cally if it is foggy. This could endanger you and X To switch off the front foglamps: press
others. Therefore, turn the light switch to the light switch in as far as it will go.
L in fog. The green N indicator lamp on the light
The automatic headlamp feature is only an switch goes out.
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times. Rear foglamp
X To switch on (vehicles with front fog-
G Risk of accident lamps): turn the key in the ignition lock to
When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch position 2 or start the engine.
from Ã to L in good time. Otherwise, X Turn the light switch to L or T. When
the headlamps could switch off temporarily the light switch is set to Ã, you cannot
and you could cause an accident. switch on the rear foglamp.
Z
80 Exterior lighting
X Pull the light switch out to the second stop. Combination switch
The yellow R indicator lamp on the light
switch lights up. Turn signals
X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the
light switch in as far as it will go.
switch goes out.
X To switch on (vehicles without front
foglamps): turn the key in the ignition lock
to position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L. When the
light switch is set to Ã, you cannot
switch on the rear foglamp.

X Turn the light switch to L. When the : Main-beam headlamps
light switch is set to c, you cannot ; Right turn signal
switch on the rear foglamp. = Headlamp flasher
X Pull the light switch out to the stop. ? Left turn signal
switch lights up.
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
X Pull the light switch out to the stop.
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
instrument cluster lights up.
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
light switch in as far as it will go.
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
switch goes out.
light switch in as far as it will go. Main-beam headlamps
The yellow R indicator lamp in the X To switch on the main-beam head-
instrument cluster goes out. lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
X To switch off the main-beam head-
lamps: move the combination switch back
to its normal position.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Exterior lighting 81
Headlamp flasher Adjusting the headlamp range (halo-

X To switch on: turn the key in the ignition gen headlamps)
lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. The headlamp range control allows you to
X Pull the combination switch briefly in the adjust the cone of light from the headlamps
direction of arrow =. to suit the vehicle load.
Hazard warning lamps

Headlamp range control
g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat
occupied
1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and
The hazard warning lamps automatically
rear seats occupied
switch on if:
2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and
Ran airbag is deployed. rear seats occupied, luggage compart-
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a ment laden
speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to 3 Not required
a standstill.
X Start the engine.
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
X Turn headlamp range control to the posi-
tion which corresponds to the load in your
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
vehicle.
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
Headlamp cleaning system
lamps: press button :. The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
ated five times while the lights are on and the
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
engine is running (Y page 88). When you
over 10 km/h again after full brake applica-
switch off the ignition, the automatic head-
tion.
lamp cleaning system is reset and counting is
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if resumed from 0.
the ignition is switched off.
Z
82 Interior lighting
Cornering light function X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
The cornering light function improves the illu-

mination of the road over a wide angle in the

direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only
be activated when the dipped-beam head-
lamps are switched on. Front overhead control panel (vehicles with a
Active: rocker switch)
Rif you are driving at speeds below : w To switch the rear interior lighting
40 km/h, the cornering light function is on/off
activated either by the turn signal or by the ; c To switch the front interior lighting
steering wheel being turned. on
Rif you are driving at speeds between = To switch the automatic interior lighting
40 km/h and 70 km/h, the cornering light control on
function is activated by the steering wheel ? | To switch the front interior lighting/
being turned. automatic interior lighting control off
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above A p To switch the front reading lamp
70 km/h or switch off the turn signals or turn on/off
the steering wheel to the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
The cornering light function may remain lit for
a short time, but is automatically switched off
after no more than three minutes.
Headlamps misted up inside

The headlamps may mist up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
X Drive with the headlamps switched on.
Front overhead control panel (vehicles with but-
Depending on the duration of the journey tons)
and the weather conditions (humidity and : w To switch the rear interior lighting
temperature), the headlamps may demist. on/off
If they do not demist: ; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
Changing bulbs 83
= p To switch the right-hand front read- The interior lighting automatically switches
ing lamp on/off on if you:
? p To switch the left-hand front reading Runlock the vehicle
lamp on/off Ropen a door
A c To switch the front interior lighting Rremove the key from the ignition lock
on/off The interior light is activated for a short while
when the key is removed from the ignition
lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off
using the on-board computer (Y page 158).
Manual interior lighting control

X To switch the front interior lighting on/

off: press the c button.
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
off: press the v button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
Rear-compartment overhead control panel press the p button.
: To switch the reading lamp off
; To switch the reading lamp on
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
Interior lighting control The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Important notes X To switch off the crash-responsive
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from emergency lighting: press the hazard
discharging, the interior lighting functions are warning lamp button.
automatically deactivated after some time or
except for when the key is in position 2 in the X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
ignition lock. key.
Automatic interior lighting control

X To switch on (vehicles with a rocker Changing bulbs
switch): set the rocker switch to centre Important safety notes
position ;.
Xenon bulbs
X To switch on (vehicles with buttons):
press the | button. If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs,
you can recognise this by the following: the
X To switch off (vehicles with a rocker
cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves
switch): set the rocker switch to from the top to the bottom and back again
the | position. when you start the engine. For this to be
X To switch off (vehicles with buttons): observed, the lights must be switched on
press the | button. before starting the engine.
Z
84 Changing bulbs
G Risk of injury pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or

Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could on safety-related systems must be carried out
get an electric shock and be seriously or even at a qualified specialist workshop.
fatally injured if you touch the electric con- If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
tacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never sult a qualified specialist workshop.
remove the cover from xenon bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have your bare hands. Even minor contamination
them replaced at a qualified specialist work- can burn into the glass surface and reduce
shop which has the necessary specialist the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-
knowledge and tools to carry out the work free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
required. when fitting.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Only use bulbs of the correct type.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or a qualified specialist workshop.

on safety-related systems must be carried out Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
at a qualified specialist workshop. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Overview of bulb replacement - bulbs
Other bulbs You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
G Risk of injury
Bulbs and lights can become very hot. For this
reason, allow them to cool down before
changing them. Otherwise, you could burn
yourself when you touch them.
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Oth-
erwise, they could damage them, for example,
and injure themselves.
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.
Such a bulb may explode and injure you.
Halogen bulbs are pressurised and could
Halogen headlamps
explode when you change them, especially if
: Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
they are very hot. You should therefore wear
eye protection and gloves when you are ; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
changing them. = Side lamp/parking lamp: W 5 W
? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs
that you cannot replace. Replace only the
bulbs listed (Y page 84). Have the bulbs that
you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Changing bulbs 85
Changing the front bulbs

Removing/fitting the washer fluid res-
ervoir
You must remove the washer fluid reservoir
in the engine compartment before replacing
the bulbs of the left-hand headlamp.
Bi-xenon headlamps
: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

; Side lamp/parking lamp: W 5 W
= Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
X To remove: turn catch : anti-clockwise.

X Remove washer fluid reservoir ; from
bracket =.
X Place washer fluid reservoir ; with con-
necting hoses to one side. Make sure that
no washer fluid escapes.
X To fit: guide the lower retaining lug into the
Tail lamp rubber grommet on the longitudinal mem-
: Brake lamp: P 21 W ber and fit washer fluid reservoir ; into
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W bracket =.
= Tail lamp: P 21/5 W X Turn catch : clockwise.
Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen

headlamps)
Licence plate lamp

: Licence plate lamp: C 5 W
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the bonnet.
Z
86 Changing bulbs
X Left-hand headlamp: remove the washer X Align the bottom of housing cover ; and
fluid reservoir (Y page 85). fold it upwards until it engages.
X Press retaining lug : down and remove X Left-hand headlamp: install the washer
housing cover ;. fluid reservoir (Y page 85).
X Pull connector = from bulb A.
X Detach retaining spring ? and remove side lamp/parking lamp
bulb A.
X Insert the new bulb so that it fits flush.
X Attach retaining spring ?.
X Attach connector = to bulb A.
X Align the bottom of housing cover ; and
fold it upwards until it engages.

X Left-hand headlamp: install the washer
fluid reservoir (Y page 85).
Main-beam headlamps (halogen head-

lamps)/cornering lamps (bi-xenon
headlamps) X Open the bonnet.
X Left-hand headlamp: remove the washer
fluid reservoir (Y page 85).
X Press retaining lug : down and remove
housing cover ;.
X Pull out bulb holder =.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder =.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =.
X Insert bulb holder =.
X Align the bottom of housing cover ; and
fold it upwards until it engages.
X Switch off the lights. X Left-hand headlamp: install the washer
X Open the bonnet. fluid reservoir (Y page 85).
X Left-hand headlamp: remove the washer
fluid reservoir (Y page 85). Turn signals
X Press retaining lug : down and remove
housing cover ;.
X Turn bulb holder = anti-clockwise and pull
it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder =.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =.
X Insert bulb holder = into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
Changing bulbs 87
X Switch off the lights. X To open: turn release knob : 90° in the
X Open the bonnet. direction of the arrow and remove side trim
X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and pull panel ;.
it out. X Left-hand side: remove the first-aid kit.
X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying X Right-hand side: remove the stowage com-
slight pressure, and remove it from bulb partment.
holder :. X To close: left-hand side: insert the first-aid
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder : and kit.
turn it clockwise while applying slight pres- X Right-hand side: insert the stowage com-
sure. partment.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn X Insert side trim panel ; and turn release
it clockwise. knob : 90° in the opposite direction to

the arrow.
Changing the rear bulbs Tail lamps

Opening and closing the side trim pan- X Switch off the lights.
els X Open the luggage compartment.
You must open the side trim panel in the lug- X Open the side trim panel (Y page 87).
gage compartment before you can change
the bulbs in the tail lamps.
X Press retaining lugs : simultaneously in

the direction of the arrow and pull the bulb
Left-hand side trim panel holder out.
Right-hand side trim panel
Z
88 Windscreen wipers
X Replace the bulb.

X Insert licence plate lamp : and press it in
until it engages.
Windscreen wipers
Switching the windscreen wipers on/
off
G Risk of accident
Bulb holder The windscreen will not longer be wiped prop-
: Brake lamp erly if the wiper blades are worn. This could
; Turn signals prevent you from observing the traffic condi-

= Tail lamp tions, thereby causing an accident. Replace
the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring
X Lightly press the corresponding bulb into and autumn.
the holder, turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder. ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers
X Insert the corresponding new bulb into the when the windscreen is dry, as this could
bulb holder and turn it clockwise. damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
X Attach the bulb holder and press firmly. that has collected on the windscreen can
The retaining lugs on the bulb holder scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
engage audibly. the windscreen is dry.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 87). ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on
the windscreen after the vehicle has been
Licence plate lamps washed in an automatic car wash, this may
be due to wax or other residue. Clean the
windscreen with washer fluid after an auto-
matic car wash.

X Open the tailgate.
X Using a screwdriver, loosen both sides of Combination switch
licence plate lamp : in the direction of the 1 0 Windscreen wipers off
arrow. 2 I Intermittent wipe/rain sensor
X Remove licence plate lamp :. 3 II Continuous wipe, slow
Windscreen wipers 89
4 III Continuous wipe, fast X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
A í Single wipe/ î To wipe the lock.
windscreen using washer fluid X Turn switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
lock.
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- Replacing the wiper blades
screen becomes dirty in dry weather con-
ditions, the windscreen wipers may be acti-
vated inadvertently. This could damage the G Risk of accident
windscreen wiper blades or scratch the

The wiper arms could start moving and cause
windscreen. an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers
For this reason, you should always switch switched on.
off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Remove the key from the ignition lock before
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or replacing the wiper blades.
Å position, the appropriate wiping fre-
quency is automatically set according to the ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper
intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the blades, make sure that you touch only the
rain sensor is more sensitive than in wiper arm of the windscreen wiper.
the Ä position, causing the windscreen ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen
wiper to wipe more frequently. wiper arm has been folded away from the
windscreen.
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without
Switching the rear window wiper on/ a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/
off rear window.
Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the
windscreen may be damaged by the force
of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades replaced by a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre.
Combination switch
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
: è Switch
2 ô To wipe with washer fluid Removing the wiper blades
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid screen.
Z
90 Windscreen wipers
Remove the key from the ignition lock before

replacing the wiper blade.
Removing the wiper blade
X Press both release clips ;.

X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.

X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A. X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the rear win-
Fitting the wiper blades dow until it engages.
X Turn wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow ; until it is released from the
retainer on the wiper arm.
X Remove wiper blade :.
Fitting the wiper blade

X Push new wiper blade : onto the wiper
arm until you feel it engage.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
X Position the new wiper blade : with X Turn wiper blade : parallel to the wiper
recess B on lug A. arm.

X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win-
arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining dow.

clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
Adjusting the spraying nozzles
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
Check the spraying nozzles setting regularly.
screen. If they have moved, you can readjust them
yourself.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade G Risk of injury
The wiper arms could start moving and cause
G Risk of injury an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers
The wiper arm could be set in motion and switched on.
injure you if the windscreen wipers are Remove the key from the ignition lock before
switched on. adjusting the spraying nozzles.
Windscreen wipers 91
! Do not use any tools, e.g. a needle, to

adjust the spraying nozzles. There is other-
wise a risk of damaging the spraying noz-
zles.

X Swivel spraying nozzles : upwards or
downwards.
X Wipe briefly with washer fluid to test them
(Y page 88).
The spraying nozzles are correctly posi-
tioned if the stream of water hits the front
windscreen approximately in the centre.
Problems with the windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers are obstructed
Leaves or snow, for example, may be
obstructing the windscreen wiper movement.
The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the
key from the ignition lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipers are inoperative

The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the combi-
nation switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Z
92
93

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ..................................................... 94
Operating the climate control sys-
tem ....................................................... 97
Adjusting the air vents ..................... 103
Climate control
94 Overview of climate control systems
Vehicle equipment this reason, you should always observe the

interval for replacing the filter, which is
i This Owner's Manual describes all models specified in the Service Booklet. As it
and all standard and optional equipment of depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
your vehicle available at the time of publi- heavy air pollution, the interval may be
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country- shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
functions.
Overview of climate control systems

Climate control
G Risk of accident
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. Otherwise, the windows
could mist up. This may obstruct your view of
the traffic situation and, as a result, you may
cause an accident.
The air-conditioning system/

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control
controls the temperature and the humidity of
the vehicle interior and filters undesirable
substances from the air.
Heatmatic/the air-conditioning system/
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control is
only operational when the engine is run-
ning14. Optimum operation is only achieved if
you drive with the side windows and pano-
rama louvred sliding sunroof closed.
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (Y page 63). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired vehicle interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most
particles of dust and completely filters out
pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
14 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the residual heat function can only be activated/deactivated
when the ignition is switched off.
Overview of climate control systems 95
Heatmatic control panel
: Sets the temperature (Y page 99)

z Demists the windscreen (Y page 100)
; Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 101)
Climate control
= Sets the airflow (Y page 100)
Switches climate control on/off (Y page 97)
? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 101)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 99)
Notes on using Heatmatic

Below, you can find a number of notes and
recommendations to help you use Heatmatic
optimally.
RSwitch on climate control by turning con-
trol knob = clockwise to the desired posi-
tion (except position 0).
ROnly use the demisting function briefly until
the windscreen is clear again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odours or
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
erwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode,
no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle.
Z
96 Overview of climate control systems
Air-conditioning system control panel
: Sets the temperature (Y page 99)

; Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 101)
Climate control
= Sets the airflow (Y page 100)

Switches climate control on/off (Y page 97)
? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 101)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 99)
B Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 98)
Notes on using the air-conditioning

system
Below, you can find a number of notes and
recommendations to help you use the air-
conditioning system optimally.
RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by
turning control knob = clockwise to the
desired position (except position 0).
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
the windscreen is clear again.
erwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode,
no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle.
Operating the climate control system 97
Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control
: Sets the airflow (Y page 100)

; Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 99)
= Demists the windscreen (Y page 100)
Climate control
? Increases the temperature, left (Y page 99)
A Switches climate control on/off (Y page 97)
B Increases the temperature, right (Y page 99)
C Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 101)
D Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 102)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 99)
F Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification
G Reduces the temperature, right (Y page 99)
H Display
I Reduces the temperature, left (Y page 99)
J Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 101)
Notes on using THERMOTRONIC auto- erwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode,

matic climate control no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle.
RUse the residual heat function if you want
The following contains instructions and rec-
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior
ommendations to enable you to get the most
when the ignition is switched off. The resid-
out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-
ual heat function can only be activated or
mate control.
deactivated with the ignition switched off.
RActivate climate control using the Ã and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
Ã and buttons light up. Operating the climate control system
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
Switching climate control on/off
the windscreen is clear again. Important information
i When climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. Only select this setting
Z
98 Operating the climate control system
briefly. Otherwise, the windows may mist G Risk of accident

up. If the "cooling with air dehumidification" func-
i Switch on climate control primarily using tion is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle
the Ã button (Y page 99). will not be cooled (during warm weather) or
dehumidified. The windows could mist up
Activating/deactivating more quickly. This may prevent you from
observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
Heatmatic/air-conditioning system ing an accident.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
lock.
the vehicle when THERMOTRONIC is in cool-
X To switch off: turn control = clockwise
ing mode. This is normal and not a sign that
to the desired position (except position 0) there is a malfunction.
(Y page 95), (Y page 96).
The cooling with air dehumidification function
X To switch off: turn control = anti-clock-
is only available with the air-conditioning sys-
wise to position 0(Y page 95), tem or THERMOTRONIC automatic climate
Climate control
(Y page 96). control.

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- i The cooling with air dehumidification
trol function uses refrigerant R134a. This cool-
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition ant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons,
lock. and therefore does not damage the ozone
layer.
X To activate: press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
Activating/deactivating
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode. X To activate: press the ¿ button.
or The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
X Press the ^ button. up.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes X To switch off: press the ¿ button.
out. The previously selected settings come The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
into effect again. out. The cooling with air dehumidification
X To switch off: press the ^ button. function has a delayed switch-off feature.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up. Problems with the cooling with air
dehumidification function
When you press the ¿ button, the indica-
Activating/deactivating cooling with tor lamp in the button flashes three times or
air dehumidification remains off. You can no longer switch on the
cooling with air dehumidification function.
Important information
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The cooling with air dehumidification function
is only available when the engine is running.
The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-
midified according to the temperature selec-
ted.
Setting climate control to automatic THERMOTRONIC automatic climate

control
Only THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
trol features the "control climate control Different temperatures can be set for the
automatically" function. driver's and front-passenger sides.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
maintained automatically at a constant level. lock.
The system automatically regulates the tem- X To increase/reduce: press the 9
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and or : button.
the air distribution.
Only change the temperature setting in
Automatic mode will achieve optimal opera- small increments. Start at 22 †.
tion if cooling with air dehumidification is also
activated. If desired, cooling with air dehu-
midification can be deactivated.
Sets the air distribution
lock. Air distribution settings
Climate control
X Set the desired temperature. z Directs the airflow through the demis-
X To activate: press the Ã button. ter vents
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights M Directs the airflow through the demis-
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow ter vents
are activated. Q Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle
X To switch off: press the Ã button. interior
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes O Directs the airflow through the foot-
out. The airflow is regulated to the level set. well and side air vents
The air distribution is set to the Q posi- P Directs the airflow to the centre and
tion. side air vents
Heatmatic/air-conditioning system
Setting the temperature
Heatmatic/air-conditioning system lock.
X Turn control A to the corresponding sym-
You can set the temperature for the entire
vehicle. bol (Y page 95), (Y page 96). The control
can also be turned to the area between two
symbols.
lock.
X To increase/reduce: turn control :
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate
clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 95),
control
(Y page 96). Only adjust the temperature
in small increments. Start at 22 †15. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Turn control E to the corresponding sym-
bol . The control can also be turned to the
area between two symbols.
15 Air-conditioning system.
Z
Setting the airflow THERMOTRONIC automatic climate

control
Heatmatic/air-conditioning system
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
lock. X To activate: press the ¦ button.
X To increase/reduce: turn control = The indicator lamp in the ¦ button lights
clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 95), up.
(Y page 96). The system automatically switches to the
following functions:
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate Rcooling with air dehumidification on
control
Rhigh airflow17
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Rhigh temperature17
lock.
Rair distribution to the windscreen and
X To increase/reduce: turn control :
front side windows
Climate control
clockwise or anti-clockwise . Rair-recirculation mode off
X To switch off: press the ¦ button.

Demisting the windscreen The indicator lamp in the ¦ button goes
out. The previously selected settings come
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
into effect again. The cooling with air dehu-
screen or to demist the inside of the wind-
midification function remains on. Air-recir-
screen and the side windows.
culation mode remains deactivated.
i You should only select the demisting or
function until the windscreen is clear again. X Press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the ¦ button goes
Heatmatic/air-conditioning system out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition automatic mode.
lock. or
X To switch on: activate cooling with air X Press one of the 9 or : temperature
dehumidification16. buttons.
X Deactivate air-recirculation mode. The indicator lamp in the ¦ button goes
X Turn controls :, = and A to the z
out. The air distribution is directed towards
the windscreen. Climate control switches
position (Y page 95), (Y page 96).
to manual mode.
X To switch off: turn controls :, = and or
A to the desired position (apart from the X Turn control : clockwise or anti-clock-
z position) (Y page 95), (Y page 96). wise .
The indicator lamp in the ¦ button goes
out. The air distribution is directed towards
the windscreen. Climate control switches
to manual mode.
16 Air-conditioning system.
17 Depending on the outside temperature.
Demisting the windows Problems with the rear window heating
Windows misted up on the inside If the indicator lamp in the |/ª rear
window heating button flashes, the on-board
X Activate the cooling with air dehumidifica- voltage is too low or the roof is open. The rear
tion function ¿18. window heating has switched off prematurely
X Activate automatic mode Ã19. or cannot be activated.
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate X Switch off any consumers that are not
the demisting function (Y page 100). required, e.g. reading lamps or interior
lighting.
i You should only select this setting until When the battery is sufficiently charged,
the windscreen is clear again. the rear window heating is activated again
automatically.
Windows misted up on the outside
XActivate the windscreen wipers.
Turn the air distribution thumbwheel to the Activating/deactivating air-recircula-
Climate control
X
O or P symbol. tion mode
i You should only select this setting until You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
the windscreen is clear again. unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle
from outside. The air already inside the vehi-
cle will then be recirculated.
Rear window heating The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels.
Activating/deactivating
G Risk of accident
G Risk of accident Only switch over to air-recirculation mode
Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could wise, the windows could mist up, thus impair-
endanger you and others. ing visibility and endangering yourself and
others. This may prevent you from observing
The rear window heating has a high current the traffic conditions, thereby causing an
draw. You should therefore switch it off as accident.
soon as the window is clear, as it only
switches off automatically after several X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
minutes. lock.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win- X To activate: press the e button.
dow heating may switch off. The indicator lamp in the e button lights
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition up.
lock.
i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-
X Press the ª20/|21 button.
matically at high outside temperatures.
The indicator lamp in the ª20/|21 When air-recirculation mode is activated
button lights up or goes out.
18 Only available with the air-conditioning system or THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.
19 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.
20 Air-conditioning system/THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.
21 Heatmatic.
Z
automatically, the indicator lamp in the dows and the panorama louvred sliding
e button is not lit. sunroof are closed.
Outside air is added after about 30 The indicator lamp in the e button lights
minutes. up. Air-recirculation mode is activated.
X To switch off: press the e button. X Convenience opening feature: press and
The indicator lamp in the e button goes hold the e button until the side win-
out. dows are opened. The side windows move
back to their original positions.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- The indicator lamp in the e button goes
matically: out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.
Rafter approximately five minutes at out- The panorama louvred sliding sunroof
side temperatures below approximately moves to the ventilation position.
7†
i If you open the side windows or the pan-
Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-
orama louvred sliding sunroof manually
ing with air dehumidification is deactiva- after closing with the convenience closing
Climate control
ted22 feature, they will remain in this position

Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out- when opened using the convenience open-
side temperatures above approximately ing feature.
7†
Activating/deactivating the residual

Convenience opening/closing using heat function
the air-recirculation button
The residual heat function is only available
G Risk of injury with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
Make sure that nobody can become trapped trol.
between the side window and the door frame It is possible to make use of the residual heat
as the side windows are opened and closed. of the engine to continue heating the station-
Make sure that all objects and body parts are ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
clear of the side windows when they are being engine has been switched off. The heating
opened or closed. You or the objects could be time depends on the temperature that has
drawn in or become trapped between the side been set.
window and the door frame as the window i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, oper-
less of the airflow setting.
ate the W switch to move the side window
in the opposite direction. i If you activate the residual heat function
Make sure that nobody can become trapped at high temperatures, only the ventilation
as the panorama louvred sliding sunroof is will be activated. The blower runs at
opened and closed. If there is a risk of entrap- medium speed.
ment, operate the 2 switch to move the X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
sliding sunroof in the opposite direction. lock or remove it.
X To activate: press the Ì button.
X Convenience closing feature: press and The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
hold the e button until the side win-
up.
22 Air-conditioning system/THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.

Adjusting the air vents 103
X To switch off: press the Ì button. Setting the centre air vents
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
i Residual heat is deactivated automati-
cally:
Rafter about 30 minutes
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
Adjusting the air vents : Centre air vent, left

; Centre air vent, right
Important safety notes = Centre vent thumbwheel, right
Climate control
G Risk of injury ? Centre vent thumbwheel, left
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to and ? up or down.
bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the
vents. Keep bare skin away from these air
outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away
to a different area of the vehicle interior. Setting the side air vents
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the bonnet free
of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles
in the vehicle interior.
i For virtually draught-free ventilation,
adjust the sliders of the air vents to the
centre position. X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
i Side window demister vent : is never
completely shut, even if side air vent ; is
shut.
Setting the air vents in the glove com-

partment
The glove compartment can be ventilated, for
instance to cool its contents, when the air-
conditioning system/THERMOTRONIC auto-
Z
104 Adjusting the air vents
matic climate control is activated. The level X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the
of airflow depends on the airflow and air dis- left or right.
tribution settings.
! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-
cle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
midification" function. Otherwise, temper-
ature-sensitive items stored in the glove
compartment could be damaged.
Climate control
: Air vent thumbwheel

; Air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or anti-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the centre vents in the rear com-
partment
: Rear-compartment air vent, left

; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
105
Vehicle equipment ............................ 106

Running-in notes ............................... 106
Driving ............................................... 106
Manual transmission ........................ 112
Driving and parking

AUTOTRONIC ..................................... 113
Refuelling ........................................... 119
Parking ............................................... 123
Driving tips ........................................ 124
Driving systems ................................ 128
Trailer towing .................................... 140
106 Driving
Vehicle equipment i You should also observe these notes on

running in if the engine or parts of the drive
i This Owner's Manual describes all models train on your vehicle have been replaced.
Driving and parking
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country- Driving

with all features described. This also G Risk of accident
applies to safety-relevant systems and Do not place any objects in the driver's foot-
functions. well. If you use a floormat or carpet in the
driver's footwell, make sure that it is correctly
secured and that there is sufficient clearance
Running-in notes for the pedals.
Important safety notes Do not place several floormats on top of one
another.
G Risk of accident Loose objects or the floormats could other-
New brake pads/linings only have optimal wise get caught between the pedals if you
braking performance after several hundred accelerate or brake suddenly. You will then
kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by not be able to brake, declutch or accelerate
applying greater force to the brake pedal. This as intended. This could lead to accidents and
also applies when brake pads/linings or injury.
brake discs have been changed.
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine
The first 1,500 km braking on a slippery road surface. This could
The more you look after the engine when it is cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
new, the more satisfied you will be with its the vehicle could skid. This could cause you
performance in the future. to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
accident.
RTherefore, drive at varying speeds and
engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this the engine's full performance until it has
period, e.g. driving at full throttle. reached operating temperature.
RChange gear in good time, at the latest Only shift AUTOTRONIC to the desired drive
when the rev counter needle is 2/3 of the position when the vehicle is stationary.
way to the red area in the rev counter dis- Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
play. wheels when pulling away on slippery
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to roads. You could otherwise damage the
brake the vehicle. drive train.
Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC:
After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the
vehicle up to full road and engine speeds.
Driving 107
Key positions AUTOTRONIC

X Shift the transmission to position P.
i You can also start the engine when the
transmission is in position N.
Driving and parking

Starting procedure
X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to
position 3 in the ignition lock
(Y page 107) and release it as soon as the
engine is running.
X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to
g To remove the key
position 2 in the ignition lock
1 Power supply for some consumers, such (Y page 107).
as the windscreen wipers The % preglow indicator lamp in the
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) instrument cluster lights up.
and drive position X When the % preglow indicator lamp
3 To start the engine goes out, turn the key to position 3
i The key can be turned in the ignition lock (Y page 107) and release it as soon as the
engine is running.
even if it is not the correct key for the vehi-
cle. The ignition is then not switched on. i You can start the engine without preglow
The engine cannot be started. if the engine is warm.
i Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: you can
Starting the engine also use the touch-start function. To do
this, turn the key to position 3
Important safety notes (Y page 107) and release it immediately.
The engine then starts automatically.
G Risk of poisoning
Never leave the engine running in enclosed
spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon Pulling away
monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti-
tutes a health hazard and could lead to loss Manual transmission
of consciousness or even death. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal depressed.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
when starting the engine.
X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.
Manual transmission X Release the parking brake (Y page 124).
X Release the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently
X Fully depress the clutch pedal. depress the accelerator pedal.

X Shift to neutral N. ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-
ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could dam-
i You can only start the engine when the
age the vehicle.
clutch pedal is fully depressed.
Z
108 Driving
i Follow the shift recommendations in the G Risk of accident

multifunction display for an economical Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill
driving style (Y page 113). start assist. After approximately one second,
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have hill start assist will no longer brake your vehi-
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors cle and it could roll away.
Driving and parking
drop down.
XTake your foot off the brake pedal.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time. i Once you have taken your foot off the
brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around
You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
one second.
ing feature (Y page 158).
X Pull away.
AUTOTRONIC Hill start assist will not function if:
i It is only possible to move the selector Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
lever from position P to the desired position downhill gradient.
if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is Ron vehicles with AUTOTRONIC, the trans-
the selector lever lock released. mission is in position N.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Rthe parking brake is applied.
depressed. RESP® is malfunctioning.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 124).
ECO start/stop function
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. General notes
i Upshifts take place at higher engine The ECO start/stop function is only available
speeds after a cold start. This helps the for the B 160 and B 180 models with manual
catalytic converter to reach its operating transmission.
temperature more quickly. The ECO start/stop function automatically
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have switches the engine off as soon as you stop
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors the vehicle. It starts the engine again as soon
drop down. as you depress the clutch pedal. The ECO
start/stop function is activated each time the
You can open the doors from the inside at engine is started using the key.
any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic lock- Automatic engine switch-off
ing feature (Y page 158).
The ECO start/stop function automatically
Hill start assist switches the engine off as soon as you stop
the vehicle.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away The ECO start/stop function is available
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. when the ECO display is shown in the multi-
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you function display.
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
Driving 109
Rbrake support is stable.

Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
The engine is stopped automatically if:
Rthe speed is low.
Driving and parking

Rneutral N is engaged.
Rthe clutch pedal is not depressed.
Automatic engine start

Example: ECO start/stop display After switching off the engine automatically,
X Brake the vehicle until it comes to a stand- the ECO start/stop function starts the engine
still. automatically again when the vehicle is sta-
The gearshift instruction to engage neutral tionary and the clutch is depressed.
N is shown in the multifunction display. X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
The engine starts automatically.
X Shift to either first or reverse gear and pull
away.
! Do not engage a gear without depressing
the clutch as this disables the automatic
engine start function. As a result, the bat-
tery cannot be recharged and the demister
function of THERMOTRONIC is not availa-
ble.
i When manoeuvring, the ECO start/stop
Example: gearshift instruction function will not automatically switch off
X Shift to neutral N and release the clutch the vehicle's engine. The engine will only be
pedal. switched off when stopping next after the
The engine is switched off automatically. vehicle has reached a speed of at least
15 km/h.
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
the ECO start/stop function to be operational i The automatic engine start feature of the
and for the ECO symbol to be shown in the ECO start/stop function starts the engine
display: more smoothly than a normal engine start
Rthe
using the ignition key.
indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
up green. The engine is started automatically by the
Rthe engine has reached operating temper- ECO start/stop function if:
ature. Rthe speed is above a certain threshold.
Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe ECO button is pressed.
Rthe outside temperature is within the suit- Rthe demister function of THERMOTRONIC
able range. luxury automatic climate control is selec-
Rthe charge status of the battery is suffi- ted.
cient.
Z
110 Driving
The engine is also started automatically if the i The ECO start/stop function is activated
ECO symbol is no longer shown in the multi- each time the engine is switched on.
function display. This is the case when a con-
dition for switching off the engine automati-
cally is no longer fulfilled, e.g. if:
Driving and parking
Rthe brake support requires the engine to be

running.
Rthe battery's charge status has decreased.
Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the driv-
er's door is opened.
Rthe bonnet is opened.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function
: To deactivate/activate the ECO start/

stop function
; Indicator lamp
X To deactivate: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; and the ECO symbol in
the multifunction display go out.
X To activate: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up and the ECO
symbol is shown in green in the multifunc-
tion display.
If not all conditions are fulfilled, the ECO
symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunc-
tion display. If this is the case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function is deactivated. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the
vehicle stops.
Driving 111
Problems with the engine

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Driving and parking

can be heard. X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
attempting to start the engine again.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 107). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
The engine does not The fuel tank is empty.

start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle.
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gauge display shows 0.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is too
start. You cannot hear weak or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 231).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

Service Centre.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

Service Centre.
Vehicles with a petrol There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical

engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
ning smoothly and is X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
misfiring. workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
Z
112 Manual transmission

The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
more than 120 †. A X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
Driving and parking
display message may to cool down.

also appear in the mul- X
Check the coolant level (Y page 207). Observe the warning
tifunction display and a
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
warning tone may
sound. If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The
coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled suffi-
ciently.
X At coolant temperatures under 120 †, drive on to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop e.g. to a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
mountain roads and stop/start driving.
Manual transmission Six-speed manual transmission

Five-speed manual transmission
Gear lever
Gear lever ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear,

you should always push the gear lever all
the way to the right. Otherwise, you could
shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear
and damage the transmission.
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
individual gears.
Shifting down at too high a speed (trans-
mission braking) can cause the engine to
overrev, leading to engine damage.
! On long and steep downhill gradients,
especially if the vehicle is laden or towing
a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3
AUTOTRONIC 113
in good time. This uses the engine's braking

effect. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from over-
heating and wearing too quickly.
Driving and parking

Neutral N with ECO start/stop func-
tion activated
In neutral N, the engine is switched off when
the vehicle speed is below a certain threshold
and the clutch pedal is not depressed. X Shift gear according to the gearshift rec-
For further information on the ECO start/stop ommendation : shown in the multifunc-
function (Y page 108). tion display of the instrument cluster.
Engaging reverse gear

AUTOTRONIC
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could Important safety notes
damage the transmission. G Risk of accident
i The ECO start/stop function is not avail- The movement of the pedals must not be
able when reverse gear is engaged. impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects
For further information on the ECO start/ in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floor-
stop function (Y page 108). mats or carpets are correctly secured and
that there is sufficient clearance for the ped-
X 5-speed manual transmission: move the
als.
gear lever to the right and then back.
Do not place several floormats on top of one
X 6-speed manual transmission: pull the
another.
gear lever up, move it to the left and then
back.
G Risk of accident
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
Shift recommendation cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
The gearshift recommendations assist you in the vehicle could skid. This could cause you
adopting an economical driving style. The rec- to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction accident.
display.
i Bear in mind that the power transmission
between the engine and the transmission
is interrupted when the engine is switched
off. Therefore, to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, shift the automatic transmis-
sion to position P and apply the electric
parking brake when the engine is switched
off and the vehicle is stationary.
Z
114 AUTOTRONIC
Selector lever You can influence the AUTOTRONIC trans-

mission ratio when the transmission is in
Introduction position D by changing gear yourself.
AUTOTRONIC is an electronically controlled,
continuously variable automatic transmis-
Driving and parking
sion. The transmission ratio is changed con- Transmission positions

tinuously. This enables it to be ideally adapted
B Park position
to your individual driving style and to provide
increased driving comfort. Prevents the vehicle from rolling
away when stopped. Do not shift
Selector lever the transmission into position
P(Y page 123) unless the vehicle
is stationary.
The key can only be removed if the
transmission is in position P. If the
key is removed from the ignition
lock, the selector lever is locked.
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
A Neutral
P Park position with selector lever lock No power is transmitted from the
R Reverse engine to the drive wheels.
N Neutral Releasing the brakes will allow you
D Drive to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
Transmission position and drive pro- If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
gram display only shift the transmission to posi-
tion N if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
! Rolling in neutral N can lead to
damage to the transmission.
7 Drive
The transmission selects the opti-
mum gear ratio automatically for
forward mode.
: Transmission position display

; Drive program display (C/S) or (C/S/M)
If you have selected one-touch gearshifting or
selector lever position D, you can see the cur-
rently engaged gear in the multifunction dis-
play.
AUTOTRONIC 115
Changing gears
AUTOTRONIC shifts to the individual gears
automatically when it is in transmission posi-
tion D. This automatic gearshifting behaviour
is determined by:
Driving and parking

Rthe selected drive program
C/S (Y page 115)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Program selector button
Driving tips C Comfort comfortable, economical

driving
Accelerator pedal position
S Sport sporty driving style
Your style of driving influences how AUTO-
TRONIC shifts gear:
i For further information about "Drive pro-
Rlittle
throttle: early upshifts gram" (Y page 116).
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
X Press program selector button : repeat-
edly until the letter for the desired gearshift
Kickdown program appears in the multifunction dis-
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. play.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear Steering wheel gearshift buttons
depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The transmission shifts back up.
Trailer towing
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed
range on uphill gradients.
X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2 depending
on the uphill or downhill gradient, even if
cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC is activa- : Right-hand steering wheel gearshift but-
ted. ton
; Left-hand steering wheel gearshift button
It is possible to shift gear using either the
Program selector button steering wheel gearshift buttons or the selec-
The program selector button allows you to tor lever.
choose between different driving character-
istics.
Z
116 AUTOTRONIC
Automatic drive program Upshifting

Drive program C is characterised by the fol- X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
lowing: towards D+.
Rcomfort-oriented engine settings or
Driving and parking
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from X Press the right-hand steering wheel gear-
AUTOTRONIC shifting up sooner shift button.
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in The transmission shifts to the next gear up,
forward and reverse gears, unless the depending on the gear currently selected.
accelerator pedal is depressed fully i If the highest permissible engine speed
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
for the gear currently engaged is reached
stability on slippery road surfaces, for and you continue to accelerate, AUTO-
example. TRONIC shifts up automatically.
RAUTOTRONIC shifting up sooner. This
results in the vehicle being driven at lower Downshifting
engine speeds and the wheels being less
likely to spin.
X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
towards D–.
Drive program S is characterised by the fol-
lowing: or
Rsporty
X Press the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
engine settings
button.
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
The transmission shifts to the next gear
RAUTOTRONIC shifting up later down, depending on the gear currently
Ras a result of the later AUTOTRONIC shift selected.
points, the fuel consumption may be higher
i To prevent the engine from overrevving,
the transmission does not shift down if you
Manual operation push the selector lever towards D– while
driving at too high a speed.
Introduction i AUTOTRONIC shifts down automatically if
When the selector lever is in position D, you the engine speed reaches the lower speed
can also change gear yourself. range for the gear currently selected.
Activating manual operation Selecting the ideal gear

X Press the selector lever lightly to the left X Press the selector lever to the left towards
towards D- or to the right towards D+. D– and hold it in position.
or or
X Press the right-hand or left-hand steering X Press and hold the left-hand steering wheel
wheel gearshift button. gearshift button.
M is shown in the multifunction display. The transmission shifts to a range which
Manual operation is activated. allows ideal acceleration and deceleration.
To do this, the transmission shifts down
one or more gears.
AUTOTRONIC 117
Deactivating manual operation

X Press and hold the selector lever towards
D+ until D appears again in the multifunc-
tion display.
or
Driving and parking

X Press and hold the right-hand steering
wheel gearshift button until D appears
again in the multifunction display.
The transmission shifts from the current
gear to D.
or
X Briefly press the program selector button
next to the selector lever (Y page 115).
The letter for the last selected drive pro-
gram C or S is shown again in the multi-
function display. The transmission shifts
from the current gear to D.
i If you restart the engine and M manual
operation is selected, AUTOTRONIC shifts
into the automatic drive program C or S. If
automatic drive program C or S has been
selected, the automatic transmission will
resume the relevant drive program when
you restart the engine.
Z
118 AUTOTRONIC
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
Driving and parking
shop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The one-touch gear- X Shift the transmission to position P.
shifting is no longer X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
working.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
The transmission no
longer changes gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Releasing the parking lock manually

In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible
to release the selector lever lock manually to
move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to
tow the vehicle away.
X Apply the parking brake.
G Risk of injury
Release pin ; can become very hot. There-
fore only press the release pin with a suitable
screwdriver or similar implement; otherwise,
you could burn yourself.
X Use suitable implement : to press release

X Remove cup holder : by pulling it pin ; and simultaneously move the selec-
upwards. tor lever out of position P.
The selector lever can now be moved freely
until it is returned to position P.
Refuelling 119
Refuelling RM15 (petrol with 15 % methanol)

RM85 (petrol with 85 % methanol)
Important safety notes RM100 (100 % methanol)
G Risk of explosion Rdiesel
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames Do not mix these fuels with petrol and do
Driving and parking

and smoking are therefore prohibited when not use any special additives. Otherwise,
handling fuels. this can lead to damage to the engine. This
Switch off the engine before refuelling. does not include additives for the removal
and prevention of residue build-up on the
G Risk of injury inlet valves.
Do not come into contact with fuels. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel
It is hazardous to your health if your skin can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injec-
comes into direct contact with fuels or you tion system could otherwise be blocked by
breathe in fuel vapours. particles from the fuel can.
i If the recommended fuel is not available,
G Risk of fire
but only as a temporary measure, you may
Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a die- also use regular unleaded petrol,
sel engine. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce
would result in damage to the fuel system and engine performance and increase fuel con-
engine, which could lead to a vehicle fire. sumption. Avoid driving at full throttle.
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a In some countries, the fuel grade available
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel may not be adequate and could cause
vehicles with a petrol engine. Even a small deposits to build up around the inlet valves.
quantity of the wrong fuel will damage the In such cases, and in consultation with a
fuel system and engine. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol
may be mixed with the additive recommen-
! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci- ded by Mercedes-Benz (part no.
dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Other- A000989254510). You must observe the
wise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify notes and mixing ratios specified on the
a qualified specialist workshop and have container.
the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com-
For further information on "Fuel", see
pletely.
(Y page 252).
Petrol (EN 228) Turbo engines

! Only refuel using super-grade unleaded
Fuel grade
petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON,
! Only refuel using unleaded premium- which conforms to European standard EN
grade petrol with at least 228 or equivalent.
95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to Euro- You can otherwise impair engine output or
pean standard EN 228 or an equivalent damage the engine.
specification.
i If the recommended fuel is not available
! Do not use the following: and only as a temporary measure, you may
RE85(petrol with 85 % ethanol) also use unleaded premium-grade petrol,
RE100 (100 % ethanol) 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce engine
Z
120 Refuelling
performance and increase fuel consump- diesel injection system could be blocked by
tion. You must avoid driving at full throttle. particles from the fuel can.
For further information on "Fuel", see
(Y page 252).
Diesel (EN 590, DIN 51628)
Driving and parking
Fuel grade Low outside temperatures

! Only refuel with diesel that conforms to Diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities
European standard EN 590 or German is available during the winter months. In
standard DIN 51628 or equivalent. You can Europe, various climate-dependent low-tem-
otherwise impair engine output or damage perature classes are defined in EN 590. Refu-
the engine. elling with diesel fuel which complies with the
climatic specifications of standard EN 590
! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in can help to prevent operating problems. At
countries outside the EU, only use low sul- exceptionally low temperatures, it is possible
phur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of that the flow properties of the fuel may be
under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission inadequate. This also applies to fuel that has
control system could be damaged. not been adapted to suit the climatic condi-
! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- tions, e.g. diesel fuel from warmer regions.
ter: the oil should be changed more fre- i Further information about country-spe-
quently in countries in which diesel with a cific fuel properties can be obtained from
higher sulphur content is available. More oil companies, e.g. at filling stations.
information about intervals for changing
the oil can be obtained from any Mercedes- Flow improver
Benz Service Centre.
Flow improvers can be added to improve the
! Using fuel that does not conform to Euro- cold resistance of diesel fuel. The effective-
pean standard EN 590 or German standard ness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with
DIN 51628 can lead to increased wear, every fuel.
engine damage and damage to the exhaust
Correct dosage and thorough mixing are deci-
system.
sive factors in ensuring improvement in low-
Do not use the following: temperature resistance. Under certain cir-
Rmarine diesel cumstances, an excessive dosage may
Rheating oil actually decrease low-temperature resist-
Rbio-diesel ance and should therefore be avoided. Follow
the manufacturer's dosing instructions.
Rvegetable oil
Mix the additive with the diesel in good time,
Rpetrol
before the flow properties of the diesel
Rparaffin
become inadequate. Malfunctions can other-
Rkerosene wise only be rectified by heating the entire
Do not mix these fuels with diesel fuels and fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a
do not use any special additives. Other- heated garage.
wise, this can lead to damage to the engine. Observe the information provided by the man-
This excludes flow improver, see "Low out- ufacturer when using a flow improver. Only
side temperatures". use flow improvers that have been tested and
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain
can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or the
Refuelling 121
further information from any Mercedes-Benz Closing

Service Centre.
X Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clock-
wise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
Refuelling
Driving and parking

Fuel filler flap i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- the fuel filler flap from closing after the
matically when you open or close the vehicle vehicle has been locked.
with the key.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
in the instrument cluster 8. The arrow Fuel filler flap emergency release
next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the vehicle. G Risk of injury
The edges on the inside of the vehicle body
can be sharp. You could injure yourself when
using the fuel filler flap emergency release.
Avoid contact with the edges on the inside of
the vehicle body.
The emergency release is located in the lug-

gage compartment behind the side trim on
the right-hand side, when viewed in the direc-
tion of travel.
: To open the fuel filler flap X Open the cover on the right-hand side of
; To insert the fuel filler cap the luggage compartment (Y page 87).
= Tyre pressure table
? Fuel type
Opening
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Reach behind the side trim panel to locate
X Completely insert the pump nozzle into the emergency release :. Turn emergency
filler neck and refuel. release : clockwise by 60° and pull it
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle back.
switches off. The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
Z
122 Refuelling
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of explosion or fire
vehicle.
Driving and parking
The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.

X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 107) in the ignition lock
immediately and remove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The engine will not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run com-
start. pletely dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds (Y page 107).
X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs
smoothly.
or
X Start the engine via the touch-start function. To do this, turn the
key to position 3(Y page 107) in the ignition lock and then
release it immediately.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately 10 seconds
(Y page 107).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until
it runs smoothly.
or
X Start the engine again via the touch-start function.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:

Parking 123

The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
not be opened. or
The key battery is discharged.
Driving and parking

X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 57).
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 121).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 121).
Parking Ron vehicles with AUTOTRONIC, the trans-

mission must be in position P and the key
Important safety notes must be removed from the ignition lock.
Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn
G Risk of accident
Only remove the key from the ignition lock
the front wheels towards the kerb.
when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot
steer the vehicle when the key is removed.
Switching off the engine
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle. They could release the parking brake. This Important safety notes
could lead to a serious or fatal accident.
G Risk of accident
G Risk of fire If the engine is not running, there is no power
Under no circumstances should the exhaust assistance for the steering and brakes. Steer-
system come into contact with flammable ing and braking then requires significantly
materials such as dry grass or petrol, for greater effort.
example. Do not park the vehicle on dry grass- As a result, you might lose control of the vehi-
land or harvested grain fields. The hot exhaust cle, cause an accident and injure yourself and
system could otherwise ignite the flammable others.
material and set the vehicle on fire. Therefore, do not switch off the engine while
you are driving.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe parking brake must be applied.
Ron vehicles with manual transmission,
engage first gear or reverse gear.
Z
124 Driving tips
Vehicles with manual transmission Parking up the vehicle

X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition than four weeks, the battery may be damaged
lock and remove it. by exhaustive discharge.
The immobiliser is activated.
Driving and parking
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 229) or

X Apply the parking brake firmly. connect it to a trickle charger.
i You can obtain information about trickle
Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
lock and remove it. than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer dam-
The immobiliser is activated. age as a result of lack of use.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
i The key can only be removed if the trans- seek advice.
mission is in position P.
Driving tips
Parking brake
General driving tips
Rolling with the engine switched off
G Risk of accident
Never switch the engine off while the vehicle
is in motion.
There is no power assistance for the steering
and the service brake when the engine is not
running.
You will require considerably more effort to
steer and brake, and you could therefore lose
X To apply: pull parking brake : up firmly. control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
The J indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up if the engine is running.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and Engine oil
keep it depressed. ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter:
On vehicles with AUTOTRONIC, the selec-
tor lever lock is released. If the vehicle is mostly driven for short dis-
tances, it is possible that malfunctions may
X Press release button ; on parking
occur during the automatic cleaning of the
brake : and move the parking brake down diesel particle filter. This can lead to engine
to the stop. damage. Therefore, if you frequently drive
The J indicator lamp in the instrument short distances, make sure to drive on
cluster goes out. motorways or country roads for 20 minutes
at least every 500 km.
Driving tips 125
Brakes ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a

higher speed. This improves the grip of the
Important safety notes brakes.
G Risk of accident
Wet road surface
Driving and parking

braking on a slippery road surface. This could If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and of time without braking, there may be a
the vehicle could skid. delayed reaction from the brakes when brak-
ing for the first time. This may also occur after
G Risk of accident the vehicle has been washed.
Make sure that other road users are not You have to depress the brake pedal more
endangered by your braking. firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
Downhill gradients After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-
On long and steep downhill stretches, espe- tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm
cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, up the brake discs, thereby drying them more
you must shift to a lower gear in good time or, quickly and protecting them against corro-
on vehicles with AUTOTRONIC, select shift sion.
range 1, 2 or 3.
i This also applies if you have activated Limited braking performance on salt
cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC. treated roads
This will use the braking effect of the engine, G Risk of accident
so less braking will be required to maintain The layer of salt on the brake discs and the
the speed. This relieves the load on the brake brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the
system and prevents the brakes from over- braking effect, resulting in a significantly lon-
heating and wearing too quickly. If you need ger braking distance, which could lead to an
additional braking, depress the brake pedal accident.
repeatedly rather than continuously.
To avoid this danger, you should:
Roccasionally brake carefully, without put-
Heavy and light loads
ting other road users at risk, when you are
G Risk of accident driving on salted roads. This helps to
Never depress the brake pedal continuously remove any salt that may have started to
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause build up on the brake discs and the brake
the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pads/linings.
pedal pressure. This causes the brake system Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
to overheat, increases the braking distance ahead and drive with particular care.
and can lead to the brakes failing completely. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
trip and immediately after commencing a
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy new trip, so that salt residues are removed
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but from the brake discs.
drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
If the brakes have been used only moderately,
you should occasionally test their effective-
Z
126 Driving tips
New brake pads/linings Driving on wet roads

G Risk of accident Aquaplaning
New brake pads/linings only reach their opti-
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
mum braking effect after several hundred kil-
on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-
Driving and parking
ometres of driving. Before this optimum brak-

planing occurring, even if:
ing effect is reached, you should compensate
for the reduced braking effect by applying Ryou drive at low speeds
greater pressure when braking. This also Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth
applies after the brake discs or the brake For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and
pads/linings have been replaced. brake carefully.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Driving on flooded roads
mends that you only have brake pads/linings
fitted to your vehicle which have been If you have to drive on stretches of road on
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which water has collected, please bear in
which correspond to an equivalent quality mind that:
standard. Brake pads/linings which have not Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is
been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or 25 cm.
which are not of an equivalent quality could Ryou should drive no faster than at walking
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
pace.
! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in
Tyre traction front or in the opposite direction create
waves. This may cause the maximum per-
G Risk of accident missible water depth to be exceeded.
Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at These notes must be observed under all
a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce circumstances. You could otherwise dam-
your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the age the engine, the electronics or the trans-
same road safety. You could otherwise cause mission.
an accident.
Pay particular attention to the road conditions
at temperatures around freezing point. Winter driving
If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g.
from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on Important safety notes
the ice when you brake, considerably reduc- Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
ing tyre traction. Drive with particular care in specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
such weather conditions. Service Centre, at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 242).
Winter tyres
Use winter tyres at temperatures below
+7 † and on snow or ice-covered roads. Only
winter tyres bearing the i snowflake sym-
bol next to the M+S marking provide the best-
possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only
Driving tips 127
these tyres will allow the ABS and ESP® driv- systems must be carried out at a qualified
ing systems to function optimally in winter, as specialist workshop.
these tyres have been designed specifically
for driving on snow. Snow chains
Use winter tyres of the same make and tread
Driving and parking

on all wheels to maintain safe handling char- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
acteristics. mends that you only use snow chains which
have been specially approved for your vehicle
G Risk of accident by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
Winter tyres with a tread depth of less than standard of quality.
4 mm must be replaced immediately. They are If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear
no longer suitable for winter use and can no the following points in mind:
longer provide sufficient grip. This could
Ryou may not attach snow chains to all
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and
wheel-tyre combinations; see the "Tyres
cause an accident.
and wheels" section in the "Technical data"
Always observe the maximum permissible chapter.
speed specified for the winter tyres you have Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emer-
fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a gency spare wheels, e.g. a "Minispare"
lower maximum permissible speed than that emergency spare wheel.
of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning RFit snow chains only in pairs and only to the
sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be front wheels. Observe the manufacturer's
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, installation instructions.
e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
! Vehicles with 17" tyres
Under these circumstances, you should also
restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle You may only fit snow chains as a pulling-
using permanent SPEED- away aid. Only use fine-link snow chains.
When snow chains are fitted, you may only
TRONIC23(Y page 132) so that it does not
drive straight ahead. The snow chains could
exceed the maximum permissible speed for
otherwise come into contact with the body-
the winter tyres.
work when you turn the front wheels.
G Risk of accident If snow chains are fitted, you cannot use
If you fit the spare wheel when driving with Active Parking Assist (Y page 136).
winter tyres, bear in mind that driving stability Do not exceed the maximum permissible
will be impaired due to unstable cornering speed of 50 km/h.
characteristics caused by the different tyres.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
Slippery road surfaces
and drive carefully.
Have the spare wheel replaced at the nearest G Risk of accident
qualified specialist workshop which has the Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to ing on a slippery road surface. This could
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz the vehicle could skid.
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
23 Only available for certain countries.
Z
128 Driving systems
You should drive particularly carefully on slip- When you are driving back on the same side
pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera- of the road as the country where the vehicle
tion, steering and braking manoeuvres. is registered, have the headlamps changed
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon
stopped when moving at low speed: as possible after crossing the border.
Driving and parking
X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage

neutral. Driving systems
X Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: shift the trans-
mission to position N. Cruise control
X Try to bring the vehicle under control using
corrective steering.
Cruise control maintains a constant road
i For more information on driving with speed for you. You must select a low gear in
snow chains, see (Y page 127). good time on long and steep downhill gradi-
ents, especially if the vehicle is laden or tow-
ing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of
Driving abroad the braking effect of the engine, which
relieves the load on the brake system and
General notes
prevents the brakes from overheating and
An extensive Mercedes–Benz Service net- wearing too quickly.
work is also available in other countries. The
G Risk of accident
Service Hotline's current telephone numbers
for use when you are abroad are to be found Do not change down for additional engine
in the "Service24h" section of the Service braking on a slippery road surface. This could
Booklet. cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
the vehicle could skid.
Only low-octane fuel is available in certain
countries. Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
You can find further information about fuel ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
grades on (Y page 119). steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 30 km/h.
Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps
G Risk of accident
If your journey takes you to countries where Cruise control cannot take account of road
vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the and traffic conditions.
road to the country in which the vehicle is Always pay attention to traffic conditions
registered, your headlamps must be switched even when cruise control is activated.
to symmetrical dipped beam. This prevents
Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist
oncoming traffic from being dazzled.
driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
Have the headlamps converted as close as speed and for braking in good time.
possible to the border before driving in these
countries. When using symmetrical lights, the
G Risk of accident
edge of the carriageway is not lit as widely
Do not use cruise control:
and as far ahead as normal.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
X Have the headlamps switched over at a
allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g.
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Driving systems 129
heavy traffic or winding roads). You could If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
otherwise cause an accident. the direction of arrow A.
Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
could cause the drive wheels to lose trac- lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
tion and the vehicle could then skid.
Driving and parking

Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, Storing and maintaining the current
heavy rain or snow speed
You can store the current speed if you are
Cruise control lever driving faster than 30 km/h.
You can operate cruise control and variable X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. speed.
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control X Briefly press the cruise control lever
lever indicates which system you have selec- up : or down ?.
ted: X Remove your foot from the accelerator
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is pedal.
selected. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED- automatically maintains the stored speed.
TRONIC is selected. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill and downhill
gradients. The stored speed is resumed
when the gradient levels out.
i Vehicles with manual transmission:
When selecting another gear, press the
accelerator pedal slightly to increase the
smoothness of the gear change.
When you depress the clutch pedal and
change to another gear, the engine speed
can increase slightly as long as no gear is
: To store the current speed or a higher selected.
speed RAlways drive at adequate, but not exces-
; LIM indicator lamp sive, engine speeds.
= To call up the last speed stored RChange gear in good time.
? To store the current speed or a lower RIf possible, do not change down several
speed gears at a time.
A To switch between cruise control and var-
iable SPEEDTRONIC Calling up the last speed stored
B To deactivate cruise control
G Risk of accident
Only call up a stored speed if you know what
Selecting cruise control
that speed is and if it is suitable for the current
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. traffic and driving situation. You can other-
If it is off, cruise control is already selected. wise endanger yourself or others by uninten-
tionally triggering sudden acceleration or
braking.
Z
130 Driving systems
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards or

you =. X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
X Remove your foot from the accelerator direction of arrow A.
pedal. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM
Cruise control is activated and adjusts the indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
Driving and parking
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored. lights up.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Setting a speed Raquaplaning is detected, for example.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a Ryou depress the clutch pedal for more than
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. four seconds on vehicles with a manual
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until transmission.
the desired speed is reached. Ron vehicles with AUTOTRONIC, you shift
X Release the cruise control lever. into position N while driving.
The new speed is stored. i The last speed stored is cleared when you
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you switch off the engine.
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed SPEEDTRONIC
to the last speed stored after you have fin- Important safety notes
ished overtaking.
SPEEDTRONIC ensures that you do not
i Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: exceed a stored speed. You must select a low
When you decelerate the vehicle using the gear in good time on long and steep downhill
cruise control lever, AUTOTRONIC shifts gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or
down if deceleration is insufficient. towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make
use of the braking effect of the engine, which
Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre- relieves the load on the brake system and
ments prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : for a higher speed or down ? for a G Risk of accident
lower speed. Never depress the brake pedal continuously
The last speed stored is increased or while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
reduced. the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
Deactivating cruise control to overheat, increases the braking distance
and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control: G Risk of accident
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- Do not change down for additional engine
wards B. braking on a slippery road surface. This could
or cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
X Brake. the vehicle could skid.
Driving systems 131
You can set a variable or permanent limit = To resume the last stored speed or to
speed: make fine adjustments in 1 km/h incre-
Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up ments
areas ? To store the current or lower speed, roun-
Rpermanent for long-term speed restric- ded down to the nearest ten
Driving and parking

tions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres A To switch between cruise control and var-
fitted (Y page 132) iable SPEEDTRONIC
B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC
G Risk of accident
Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC
driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.
speed and for braking in good time.
If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already
i The speed indicated in the speedometer selected.
may differ slightly from the limit speed If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
stored. the direction of arrow A.
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
Variable SPEEDTRONIC lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is
selected.
General notes
You can operate cruise control and variable G Risk of accident
SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the limit speed stored.
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
lever indicates which system you have selec- Only use variable SPEEDTRONIC if you will not
ted: have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above
that stored as the limit speed. You could oth-
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is erwise cause an accident.
selected.
You can only exceed the limit speed stored if
RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
you deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC:
TRONIC is selected.
Rusing the cruise control lever
You can use the cruise control lever to limit
Rby depressing the accelerator pedal
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
the engine is running. beyond the pressure point (kickdown)
It is not possible to deactivate variable
SPEEDTRONIC by braking.
Storing the current speed

You can use the cruise control lever to limit
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
the engine is running.
up : or down ?.
The current speed is stored. SPEEDTRONIC
rounds up or down to the nearest ten. You
: To store the current or higher speed, roun- will see the Limit message and the stored
ded up to the nearest ten speed in the upper multifunction display for
; LIM indicator lamp approximately five seconds. The yellow LIM
Z
132 Driving systems
indicator lamp lights up in the instrument or

cluster. X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
i On downhill gradients, the speed can be direction of arrow A.
exceeded despite SPEEDTRONIC. In this LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
case, you will hear a warning tone and the lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is
Driving and parking
Limit exceeded message will appear in deactivated.

the multifunction display. If necessary, Cruise control is selected.
apply the brakes yourself. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated auto-
Calling up the last speed stored matically when you depress the accelerator
pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown),
G Risk of accident but only if your current speed does not differ
Only select a stored speed if you know what by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed.
that speed is and whether it is suitable for the
current driving and traffic situation. Other- G Risk of accident
wise, sudden braking could endanger you or It is not possible to deactivate variable Speed-
others. tronic by braking.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards i The last speed stored is cleared when you
you =. switch off the engine.
Making adjustments in 10 km/h incre- Permanent SPEEDTRONIC

ments
You can use the on-board computer to limit
the speed permanently to a value between
up : for a higher speed or down ? for a 160 km/h (e.g. for driving on winter tyres)
lower speed. and the maximum speed (Y page 158).
or Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until appears in the multifunction display.
the desired speed is set. Press the cruise Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active,
control lever up : for a higher speed or even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.
down ? for a lower speed. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,
even if you depress the accelerator pedal
Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre-
beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
ments
X For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise
control lever towards you =. PARKTRONIC
or
X Keep the cruise control lever pulled
towards you = until the desired speed is G Risk of accident
set. PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not
detect all obstacles. This system does not
Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC
relieve you of the need to pay attention.
There are several ways to deactivate variable
You are always responsible for safety and
SPEEDTRONIC:
must continue to pay attention to your imme-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- diate surroundings when parking and
wards B.
Driving systems 133
manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger

yourself and others.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
Driving and parking

the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
could be injured.
Side view
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rrelease the parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your Top view
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper Front sensors
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
Centre approximately 100 cm
Corners approximately 60 cm
Rear sensors
Centre approximately 120 cm
Corners approximately 80 cm
! When parking, pay particular attention to

objects above or below the sensors, such
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-
side (example) TRONIC does not detect such objects when
they are in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or
Range of the sensors
the objects.
General notes The sensors may not detect snow and
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources.
slush; otherwise they may not function cor- Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
care not to scratch or damage them or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARK-
(Y page 212). TRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
Z
134 Driving systems
Minimum distance Manual transmission:

Centre approximately 20 cm Gear lever posi- Warning display
Corners approximately 20 cm tion
Forwards gear Front area activated
Driving and parking
If there is an obstacle within this range, the or

relevant warning displays light up and a warn- Neutral
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
the minimum, the distance may no longer be Reverse gear Rear and front areas
shown. activated
Warning displays AUTOTRONIC:

The warning displays show the distance Transmission Warning display
between the sensors and the obstacle. The position
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the centre air vents. D Front area activated
The warning display for the rear area is loca-
R or N Rear and front areas
ted on the roof lining in the rear compart-
activated
ment.
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
Rfront area: following the sixth segment,
you will hear an intermittent warning tone;
after the seventh segment, you will hear a
continuous warning tone for a maximum of
two seconds. This indicates that you have
now reached the minimum distance.
Warning display for the front area
Rrear area: from the sixth segment
: Segments on the left-hand side of the
onwards, you will hear an intermittent
vehicle
warning tone. At the seventh segment, you
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
will hear a continuous warning tone for a
vehicle maximum of two seconds. This indicates
= Segments showing operational readiness that you have now reached the minimum
The warning display for each side of the vehi- distance. The continuous warning is muted
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg- immediately if you deselect reverse gear on
ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow vehicles with manual transmission or if you
segments showing operational readiness = shift into D or P on vehicles with AUTO-
light up. TRONIC.
The gear lever position or, in the case of
AUTOTRONIC, the transmission position
determines which warning display is active
when the engine is running.
Driving systems 135
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking

: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
; Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Trailer towing
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer.
! Remove the detachable ball coupling if
the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARK-
TRONIC measures the minimum detection
range to an obstacle from the bumper, not
the ball coupling.
Z
136 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking
warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.

You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds,
and the indicator lamp
in the PARKTRONIC
button lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 212).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
imately 20 seconds. ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist to the parking space are not taken into
account. For instance, this may be the case
Important safety notes when the vehicle parked in front of or behind
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking the space changes its position or when an
aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to obstacle is moved into the parking space.
measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist does not relieve you of
A suitable parking space is indicated by the the responsibility of paying attention. If you
parking symbol. Active steering intervention rely solely on Active Parking Assist, you could
can assist you during parking. You may also cause an accident and injure yourself and oth-
use PARKTRONIC (Y page 132). When PARK- ers.
TRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist You are always responsible for safety and
is also unavailable. must continue to pay attention to your imme-
G Risk of accident diate surroundings when parking and
manoeuvring.
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid and may
sometimes recommend parking spaces that
G Risk of accident
are not suitable for parking. For example,
these might be spaces where parking is pro- Objects located above the height range of
hibited, driveways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
Active Parking Assist measures the parking
are not taken into account when the parking
space as you drive past it. Any later changes
Driving systems 137
procedure is calculated, e. g. overhanging Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes

loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods from your vehicle, you should not use
vehicles. In some circumstances, Active Park- Active Parking Assist.
ing Assist may therefore guide you into the Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow
parking space too early. This may lead to a chains or an emergency spare wheel are
Driving and parking

collision. For this reason, you should avoid fitted.
using Active Parking Assist in such situations. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
G Risk of accident on the parking characteristics of the vehi-
The front of the vehicle will veer out in the cle.
direction of the oncoming traffic during the Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking operation. In some cases the vehicle parking space after parking is dependent
will also take you onto sections of the oncom- on various factors. These include the posi-
ing lane during the parking procedure. tion and shape of the vehicles parked in
You are responsible for safety at all times and front and behind it and the conditions of the
must pay attention to any road users location. In some cases, Active Parking
approaching or passing. Stop the vehicle if Assist may guide you too far into a parking
necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist space, or not far enough into it. In some
parking procedure. cases, it may also lead you across or onto
the kerb. If necessary, you should abort the
G Risk of injury parking procedure with Active Parking
Make sure that no persons or animals are in Assist.
the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they Ryou can also engage forward gear prema-
could be injured. turely. The vehicle redirects and does not
drive as far into the parking space. Should
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: a gear be changed too early to achieve a
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel sensible parking position, the parking pro-
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends cedure will be aborted.
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
not on the pavement obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at
Parking tips: a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tyres.
Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possi-
ble past the parking space.
Detecting parking spaces
Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars Active Parking Assist is switched on automat-
might be identified incorrectly or not at all. ically when driving forwards. The system is
Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking operational at speeds of up to approximately
space being measured inaccurately. 35 km/h. While in operation, the system inde-
Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC
pendently locates and measures parking
spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When
(Y page 134) warning messages during the
driving at speeds below 35 km/h, you will see
parking procedure.
the parking symbol as a status indicator in the
Ryou can intervene in the steering procedure
instrument cluster. Active Parking Assist only
to correct it at any time. Active Parking displays parking spaces on the front-
Assist will then be cancelled. passenger side as standard. Parking spaces
on the driver's side are displayed as soon as
Z
138 Driving systems
the turn signal on the driver's side is activa- manoeuvring. You could, otherwise, endanger
ted. If you wish to park in a space on the driv- yourself and others.
er's side, the indicator on the driver's side
must remain on. This must remain switched X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
on until you acknowledge the use of Active symbol shows the desired parking space in
Driving and parking
Parking Assist by pressing the & button the instrument cluster.

on the multifunction steering wheel. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to
When a parking space has been detected, an reverse gear.
arrow towards the right or the left also Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: shift the trans-
appears. mission to position R.
The Park Assist Activate? Check
vehicle surroundings. Yes: No: mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the *
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X To park using Active Parking Assist: press
the & button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel.
Detected parking space (example) The Park Assist active Please
: Detected parking space on the left accelerate and brake the vehicle
yourself message appears in the multi-
; Parking symbol
function display.
= Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking G Risk of accident
spaces: When parking, you need to make sure that no
obstacles are located in the vicinity of the
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel vehicle during the entire operation. Active
Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide Parking Assist does not relieve you of the
Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your responsibility of paying attention. It merely
vehicle aids you by intervening actively in the steer-
A parking space is displayed while you are ing.
driving past it, and until you are approx- To stop the vehicle or avoid an accident you
imately 15 m away from it. need to apply the brakes yourself.
Parking XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.

XBack up the vehicle, being ready to brake
G Risk of accident at all times. When reversing, do not exceed
PARKTRONIC and Active Parking Assist are a speed of approximately 10 km/h; other-
merely parking aids and may not detect all wise, Active Parking Assist will be deacti-
obstacles. They do not relieve you of the vated.
responsibility of paying attention. i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
You are always responsible for safety and the best parking results by backing up as
must continue to pay attention to your imme-
diate surroundings when parking and
Driving systems 139
far as possible. When doing so, also Parking Assist is now deactivated. PARK-
observe the PARKTRONIC messages. TRONIC is still available.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the X Manoeuvre if necessary.
continuous warning tone, if not before. X Always observe the warning messages dis-
Manoeuvring may be required in tight park- played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 134).
Driving and parking

ing spaces.
Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Cancelling Active Parking Assist
Assist active Please shift to a
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
forward gear message appears in the mul-
time.
tifunction display.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: the Park
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Assist active Please shift to D mes-
Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at
once. The Park Assist cancelled mes-
X Vehicles with manual transmission: when
the vehicle is stationary, shift to first gear.
or
Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: shift the trans- X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
mission to position D while the vehicle is
centre console (Y page 135).
stationary.
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
Parking Assist is immediately cancelled.
the other direction.
The Park Assist cancelled message
The Park Assist active Please appears in the multifunction display.
accelerate and brake the vehicle
yourself message appears in the multi- Active Parking Assist is cancelled automati-
function display. cally if:
i You will achieve the best parking results Ra gear is changed/the transmission is shif-
by waiting for the steering procedure to ted too early.

complete before moving forwards. Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all longer possible.
Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h.
times.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
continuous warning tone, if not before. d warning lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster.
Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park
Assist active Please shift into A warning tone sounds. The parking space
reverse gear message appears in the mul- symbol disappears and the multifunction dis-
tifunction display. play shows the Park Assist cancelled
message.
Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: the Park
Assist active Please shift to R mes- When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you
sage appears in the multifunction display. must steer again yourself.
X Further gear changes/transmission
Trailer towing
changes may be necessary.
As soon as the parking procedure is com- For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min-
plete, the Parking assistance finished imum length for parking spaces is slightly
Please take over message appears. Active increased.
Z
140 Trailer towing
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, G Risk of accident

you should not use Active Parking Assist. Never depress the brake pedal continuously
Once the electrical connection is established while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
between your vehicle and the trailer, Active the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
Parking Assist is no longer available. PARK- pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
Driving and parking
TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. to overheat, increases the braking distance
and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
Trailer towing G Risk of accident
Notes on towing a trailer On no account should you attempt to draw the
vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing
Important safety notes speed.
G Risk of accident
When reversing the vehicle towards the General information
trailer, make sure there is nobody between i Check the tyre pressure when towing a
the trailer and the vehicle. trailer. You will find the values in the tyre
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If pressure table in the fuel filler flap of the
you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle (Y page 239).
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become
You will find installation dimensions and loads
detached.
in the "Technical data" section
Make sure that the following values are not (Y page 259).
exceeded:
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight noseweight on the ball coupling is 75 kg.
Rthe permissible trailer load However, the actual noseweight must not
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing exceed the value given on the trailer tow hitch
vehicle and trailer identification plates. The lowest
Rthe
weight applies.
maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight of both the towing vehicle and the ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to
trailer the maximum permissible noseweight. Do
You will find the applicable permissible val- not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg,
ues, which must not be exceeded, in the vehi- otherwise the trailer may come loose.
cle documents. Bear in mind that the payload and the rear
You will find the values approved by the man- axle load are reduced by the actual nose-
ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates weight.
and those for the towing vehicle in the "Tech- i The height of the ball coupling changes
nical data" section. with the load of the vehicle. If necessary,
use a trailer with a height-adjustable draw-
G Risk of accident bar.
Always observe the maximum speed permit-
ted in Germany for vehicle/trailer combina- Driving tips
tions, even in countries where higher speeds
are permitted. This lowers the risk of an acci- In Germany, the maximum permissible speed
dent. for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on
the type of trailer and is either 80 km/h or
100 km/h. In some countries, higher maxi-
Trailer towing 141
mum speeds are permissible for vehicle/ Driving tips

trailer combinations. Before beginning the RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-
journey, check the trailer's documents to see
cle in front than when driving without a
what the maximum permitted speed is.
trailer.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the max- RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
Driving and parking

imum permissible rear axle load is increased
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical
Then increase the braking force rapidly.
data" section to find out whether this applies
RThe values given for gradient-climbing
to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added
maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
the vehicle/trailer combination may not level. When driving in mountainous areas,
exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for note that the power output of the engine,
reasons concerning the operating permit. and consequently the vehicle's gradient-
This also applies in countries in which the climbing capability, decrease with increas-
permissible maximum speed for vehicle/ ing altitude.
trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. If the trailer swings from side to side:
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling X Do not accelerate.
characteristics will be different in comparison X Do not counter-steer.
to when driving without a trailer.
X Brake if necessary.
The vehicle/trailer combination:
Ris heavier
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi- Fitting the ball coupling
ent-climbing capability X Make a note of the ball coupling key num-
Rhas an increased braking distance
ber.
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds
Rdemands more sensitive steering
i You can use this number to obtain a
replacement key from a Mercedes-Benz
Rconsumes more fuel
Service Centre.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you
must shift to a lower gear in good time, or on G Risk of injury
vehicles with AUTOTRONIC, select shift range If the ball coupling does not engage properly
1, 2 or 3. when it is attached, the vehicle/trailer com-
bination is not secured and could become
i This also applies if you have activated
detached. As a result, you could cause an
cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC. accident. Attach the ball coupling carefully
This will use the braking effect of the engine, and make sure that it engages.
so less braking will be required to maintain
the speed. This relieves the load on the brake Vehicles without ECO start/stop func-
system and prevents the brakes from over- tion: the detachable ball coupling is in the
heating and wearing too quickly. If you need stowage compartment on the right-hand side
additional braking, depress the brake pedal of the luggage compartment.
repeatedly rather than continuously. X Open the stowage compartment on the
right-hand side of the luggage compart-
ment (Y page 186).
X Fold the cover down.
Z
142 Trailer towing
X Pull protective cap : down in the direction

of the arrow out of the ball coupling recess.
X Place protective cap : into the ball cou-
pling recess.
Driving and parking
Vehicles without ECO start/stop function

X Loosen fastening strap ;.
X Remove ball coupling : from the ball cou-
pling recess.
Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: X Pull protective cap ; off the lock in the
the attachable ball coupling is in the ball cou- handwheel.
pling recess in the stowage well underneath X Insert key : into the ignition lock.
the luggage compartment floor.
The red mark on the handwheel must be
X Open the luggage compartment floor aligned with the green area on the ball cou-
(Y page 197). pling (fitting position). If this is not the case:
X Turn key : in the direction of the arrow.
The key is released.
Vehicles with ECO start/stop function

X Remove ball coupling : from ball coupling
recess ; X Pull handwheel ? away from the ball cou-
pling and turn it clockwise until it engages.
The green area on the ball coupling is
aligned with the red mark on the hand-
wheel.
X Insert the ball coupling in the direction of
the arrow into ball coupling recess = until
it engages.
Handwheel ? turns so that green mark
A on the handwheel is aligned with green
area B on the ball coupling.
Trailer towing 143
If the ball coupling can still not be fitted

(locked) after it has been cleaned, remove the
ball coupling. The trailer coupling must then
not be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation
is not guaranteed.
Driving and parking

Have the entire trailer coupling checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In par-
ticular, work relevant to safety or on safety-
related systems must be carried out at a quali-
X Turn key : to the stop in the direction of fied specialist workshop.
the arrow to lock.
X Remove key :.
X Press protective cap ; onto the lock. Coupling up a trailer
i You can store the key in the ball coupling G Risk of injury
recess in the luggage compartment. Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged
overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could
become trapped between the bumper and
trailer drawbar.
X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-

tion P.
X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle.
X Couple up the trailer.
X Establish the electrical connection
between the vehicle and the trailer.
X Fold trailer power socket : down.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is
G Risk of accident working.

The ball coupling is only securely mounted
when the green mark on the handwheel is
aligned with the green area on the ball cou- Decoupling a trailer
pling and the key can be removed. If the ball G Risk of injury
coupling is not securely mounted, it may
As soon as you raise the trailer drawbar, the
come loose.
unladen vehicle rises slightly. The vehicle then
The ball coupling must be locked and the key lowers to driving level.
must be removed when towing a trailer. This
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
is the only way to guarantee that the ball cou-
wheel arch or the underbody. You could oth-
pling is secured and cannot come loose while
erwise trap yourself or others.
the vehicle is in motion. If the ball coupling
cannot be locked and the key cannot be
removed, remove the ball coupling and clean
G Risk of injury
it. The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-
nect the trailer cable. Make sure that nobody
Z
144 Trailer towing
is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the Rbrake sharply

underbody. You could otherwise trap yourself Rchange direction suddenly
or others. Rhave an accident
As soon as you decouple the trailer, the unla-
den vehicle rises slightly. Make sure that you X Vehicles without ECO start/stop func-
Driving and parking
or others are not injured in the process. tion: open the stowage compartment on
the right of the luggage compartment.
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an X Fold the trim downwards.
engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
X Vehicles with start/stop function: open
vehicle could be damaged by the rebound-
the luggage compartment floor.
ing of the overrun brake.
X Remove the protective cap from the ball
X Make sure that the transmission is in posi- coupling recess.
tion P.
X Replace the cover.
X Store the ball coupling with the key inser-
X Secure the trailer against rolling away.
ted in the ball coupling recess.
X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the
X Vehicles without ECO start/stop func-
trailer. tion: secure the ball coupling in place using
the fastening strap.
X Fold the trailer power socket upwards.
Removing the ball coupling
X Pull the protective cap off the lock in the
handwheel. Trailer power supply
X Use the key to unlock the lock in the hand-
When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's
wheel. trailer socket is equipped with a permanent
X Hold the ball coupling. Pull the handwheel power supply and a power supply that is
away from the ball coupling and turn it switched on via the ignition lock.
clockwise until it engages. The permanent power supply is supplied via
The green area on the ball coupling is trailer socket pin 9.
aligned with the red mark on the hand-
The power supply that is switched on via the
wheel.
ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin
X Pull out the ball coupling downwards.
10.
X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.
! You can connect consumers with a power
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer rating of up to 240 W to the permanent
tow hitch can be found at (Y page 213). power supply and up to 180 W to the power
supply that is switched on via the ignition
lock.
Storing the ball coupling
You must not charge a trailer battery using
G Risk of accident the power supply.
Never transport an unsecured ball coupling in The trailer's turn signal lamps are only guar-
the interior of the vehicle. anteed to function when bulbs are used.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be You can obtain further information about
injured by the ball coupling being thrown if installing the trailer electrics from a qualified
you: specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Trailer towing 145
X To switch the connected power supply

on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock
to position 2 or 0 respectively.
Driving and parking

Trailer with 7-pin connector
General information
If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can
connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball
coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an
adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
Fitting the adapter
X Fold down the socket.

X Open the socket cover.
X Insert the connector with lug : into
groove ; on the socket and turn the con-
nector clockwise to the stop.
X Let the cover engage.
X If you are using an adapter cable, secure
the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
play so that the cable cannot become
detached when cornering.
Z
146 Trailer towing
Problems with trailer towing

The ball coupling can- G Risk of accident
not be locked.
Driving and parking
The ball coupling is dirty.

The key cannot be
The trailer tow hitch is damaged.
removed from the ball
coupling. X Remove the ball coupling and clean it (Y page 213). If the ball
coupling still cannot be locked, remove the ball coupling. It must
no longer be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation is not guar-
anteed.
X Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
147
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 148
Menus and submenus ...................... 151
Display messages ............................. 162
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 178
148 Displays and operation
Vehicle equipment G Risk of accident

The on-board computer only records and dis-

i This Owner's Manual describes all models plays malfunctions and warnings from certain
and all standard and optional equipment of systems. For this reason, you should always
your vehicle available at the time of publi- make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country- could otherwise cause an accident by driving
specific differences are possible. Please an unsafe vehicle.
with all features described. This also G Risk of accident and injury
applies to safety-relevant systems and The operating safety of your vehicle could be
functions. jeopardised if maintenance work is carried
out incorrectly. As a result, you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
Important safety notes In addition, the safety systems may no longer
be able to protect you or others as they are
You will find an illustration of the instrument designed to do.
cluster in the "At a glance" section
Always have maintenance work carried out at
(Y page 22).
a qualified specialist workshop. The qualified
G Risk of accident specialist workshop must have the necessary
Only use the on-board computer when road specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
and traffic conditions permit. You would oth- the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
erwise be distracted and unable to concen- mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
trate properly on driving, and could cause an Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
accident. relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
G Risk of accident cialist workshop.
If the instrument cluster or multifunction dis-
play fails, no messages can be displayed.
This means that you will not see information
Displays and operation
about the driving situation, such as the speed, Coolant temperature gauge
outside temperature, warning/indicator
lamps, display messages or system failures. The coolant temperature gauge is in the
Handling characteristics may be affected. instrument cluster on the left-hand side.
Adapt your driving style and speed accord- Under normal operating conditions and with
ingly. the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
Immediately consult a qualified specialist perature may rise to 120 †.
workshop which has the necessary specialist The coolant temperature may rise to the top
knowledge and tools to carry out the work end of the scale at high outside temperatures
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that and on long uphill stretches.
you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
safety or on safety-related systems must be Rev counter
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The red band in the rev counter indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
Displays and operation 149
! Do not drive in the overrevving range. : Multifunction display

Doing so will damage the engine.
; WX
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached. Selects submenus in the Settings
menu
Changes values
Outside temperature display Adjusts the volume
The outside temperature display is in the mul- = ~
tifunction display (Y page 150).
Rejects or ends a call
G Risk of accident Exits the phone book/redial memory
At temperatures just above freezing point, the 6
street may be icy, especially in wooded areas Makes or accepts a call
or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving
Switches to the redial memory
style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid.
For this reason, adapt your driving style and ? &*
speed to the weather conditions. Scrolls back and forth within a menu
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- &*
played after a short delay. Press briefly
Audio 5: in the Audio menu: selects
an audio track or, depending on the
Operating the on-board computer settings, selects a stored or the
The on-board computer is activated as soon next/previous station.
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition Audio 20, Audio 50 APS and
lock. COMAND APS: in the Audio menu:
You can control the multifunction display and selects a stored station, an audio
the settings in the on-board computer using track or a video scene
the buttons on the multifunction steering Audio 20, Audio 50 APS and
wheel. COMAND APS: in the Telephone
menu: switches to the phone book
and selects a name or a telephone
number
&*
Press and hold (Audio 20, Audio
50 APS and COMAND APS):
In the Audio menu: selects the pre-
vious/next station or selects an
audio track using rapid scrolling
In the Telephone menu: starts rapid
scrolling through the phone book
A VU
Selects a menu: scrolls back and
forth
Z
150 Displays and operation
Multifunction display
Values and settings as well as display mes-

sages are shown in the multifunction display.
: Display area for menus or submenus

; Status bar with outside temperature or
speed (Y page 156)
Menus and submenus 151
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle.
Function
: Standard display menu (Y page 152)
RTyre pressure loss warning (Y page 241)
RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 209)
REngine oil level (Y page 205)
; Audio menu (Y page 152)

= Navigation(Y page 154) menu
? Message memory24 menu (Y page 162)
A Settings menu (Y page 155)
B Trip computer menu (Y page 159)
C Telephone menu (Y page 160)
For the Audio 5, the on-board computer displays the Audio and Telephone menus in English.
The language for these menus is not dependent on the language selected for the multifunction
display.
Audio 20, Audio 50 APS and COMAND APS:
24 The menu is only visible when there is a display message.
Z
152 Menus and submenus
Depending on the audio system fitted, the Audio, Navigation and Telephone menus are
slightly different. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with
COMAND APS.
Standard display menu X Press V or U on the steering wheel

to select the standard display.
Standard display X Press the & or * button to select
X Press V or U on the steering wheel digital speedometer or the outside temper-
to select the standard display. ature.
Standard display Digital speedometer (example)

: Trip meter : Digital speedometer
; Total distance recorder
You can select the following functions in the Audio menu
Standard display menu by pressing & or
*: Selecting a radio station
Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 241) You can only change the waveband and store
Rdigital speedometer or outside tempera- new stations using the audio system or
ture (Y page 152) COMAND APS.
RASSYST PLUS service interval display X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
(Y page 209) APS and select Radio (see the separate
Rengine oil level (Y page 205) operating instructions).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
X To reset the trip meter: press and hold
the reset button on the left of the instru- to select the Audio menu.
ment cluster until the trip meter has been Audio 5:
reset.
X Press the & or * button to select the
desired station.
Displaying the digital speedometer or The type of search depends on the radio
outside temperature station selection settings (Y page 158).
If you have selected the digital speedometer The next stored station is selected, or the
as the status line (Y page 156), the outside station search starts.
temperature is displayed here25.
25 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed.

: Waveband26 CD player display (example)
; Current channel : Function (the CD number is also shown
with a CD changer)
Audio 20, Audio 50 APS or COMAND APS:
; Current track
X To select a stored channel: briefly press
the & or * button.
Operating audio devices or media
X To select a channel from the channel
list: press and briefly hold the & or Audio data from various audio devices or
* button. media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment fitted in the vehicle.
X To select a station using the station
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
search27: press and briefly hold the &
APS and select the audio device or medium
or * button.
(see the separate operating instructions).
i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast- X Press V or U on the steering wheel
ing); see separate operating instructions. to select the Audio menu.
Operating the CD player (Audio 5)

You can play MP3/WMA CDs in the Audio 5
drive.
X Switch on the audio system and select the
CD player (see the separate operating
instructions).
to select the Audio menu.
X Press the & or * button to select a
CD track. CD changer display (example)
: Current CD
; Current track
26 When current channel ; has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.
27 Only if no station list is received.
Z
X To select the next/previous track: X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

briefly press the & or * button. APS (see the separate operating instruc-
X To select a track from the track list tions).
(rapid scrolling): press and briefly hold the X Press V or U on the steering wheel
& or * button. to select the Navigation menu.
The current track will not be displayed in
audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: Route guidance inactive
external audio source connected).
Video DVD operation

X Switch on COMAND APS and select video
DVD (see the separate operating instruc-
tions).
to select the Audio menu.
: Direction of travel
Route guidance active

The multifunction display shows navigation
instructions, for example:
DVD changer display (example)

: Current DVD (for DVD changer)
; Current scene
X Press the & or * button to select a
scene.
Navigation menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navigation menu: the instructions
from the navigation system appear in the mul-
tifunction display. For more information, see
the separate operating instructions.
Setup menu X Press the reset button again.

The settings of most functions are restored
Introduction to the factory settings.
or
X If you want to retain the settings, do not
press the reset button a second time.
After approximately five seconds, the Set‐
tings menu reappears.
X Press V or U to select a different
menu.
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-
The Settings menu allows you to: tance
Rrestoring the factory settings
The Display unit Speed-/odom. function
Rchanging the instrument cluster settings
allows you to choose whether certain displays
Rchanging the time/date settings28 appear in kilometres or miles.
Rchanging the light settings The selected unit of measurement for dis-
Rchanging the vehicle settings tance applies to:
Rchanging the convenience settings Rthe digital speedometer29
Rthe total distance recorder and the trip
Resetting to factory settings meter
For safety reasons, not all functions will be Rthe trip computer
reset: permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be Rthe navigation instruction in the Naviga-
set in the Vehicle submenu. The Headlamp tion menu
mode setting in the Lighting submenu is only RSPEEDTRONIC
reset if the vehicle is stationary. X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
to select the Settings menu. X Press the & button to select submenus.
X Press and hold the reset button on the left
X Press W or X to select the Inst.
of the instrument cluster for approximately
cluster submenu.
three seconds.
X Press & to select Display unit
A prompt appears in the multifunction dis-
play asking you to confirm by pressing the Speed-/odom..
reset button again. X Press the W or X button to select
km or miles as the unit of measurement for
distance.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
28 This function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS, Audio 55 APS or COMAND APS.
29 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the digital speedometer always displays km/h.
Z
Selecting the language Your vehicle could have the following audio
The Language: function allows you to select equipment:

the language for the instrument cluster. A: Audio 5 or Audio 20
X Press V or U on the steering wheel B: Audio 50 APS
to select the Settings menu. C: COMAND APS
X Press & to call up the selection of sub-
X Refer to the separate operating instruc-
menus. tions to find out which audio system is fit-
X Press W or X to select the Inst. ted in your vehicle.
cluster submenu.
Depending on the audio system, the time and
X Press the & button to select Language.
date are received from GPS satellites and
X Press the W or X button to select the cannot be set using the on-board computer
desired language. (see the following table).
A B C
Setting using the on-board com- X
Selecting the status line display puter
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this func-
Automatic GPS satellite recep- X X
tion is not available.
tion
to select the Settings menu. X Press V or U on the steering wheel
menus. X Press the & button to select submenus.
X Press W or X to select the Inst.
X Press the W or X button to select the
cluster submenu.
Time/Date submenu.
X Press & to select Status line dis‐
X To set the clock: press & on the steer-
play. ing wheel to selectTime Hours or Time
X Press W or X to select the display in Minutes.
the status line: speed (Speed) or outside or
temperature (Outside temp.). X To set the date: press & to select
The selected display now appears con- Date Set day, Date Set month or Date
stantly in the lower multifunction display. Set year.
When you scroll through the Standard dis-
X Press W or X to set a value.
play menu (Y page 152), you will see the
display you have not selected. X Press the &, V or U button to
X Press the &, V or U button to select a different display.

Lighting
Time/date Switching the daytime driving lights on/
This submenu is only available on vehicles off
without an audio system or with Audio 5 or If you have activated the daytime driving
Audio 20. lights function and the light switch is in the
The Time/Date submenu allows you to set $ or Ã position, the side lamps,
the time and the date. dipped-beam headlamps and licence plate
lighting are switched on automatically when X Press the W or X button to activate

the engine is running. or deactivate the Surround lighting
Turning the light switch to a different position function.
switches on the corresponding lights. Turn X Press the &, V or U button to
the light switch to L or Ã first if you select a different display.
wish to switch off the daytime driving lights
while driving in the dark. Activating/deactivating the exterior
In countries where daytime driving lights are lighting delayed switch-off
a legal requirement, the function is activated When you activate the Headl. delay
as part of the factory settings. switch-off function, the exterior lighting
X Press V or U on the steering wheel remains on for another 15 seconds after clos-
to select the Settings menu. ing the doors when it is dark.
X Press the & button to select submenus.
If the engine is switched off and then none of
the doors are opened, or if an open door is
not closed, the exterior lighting goes out after
Lighting submenu. 60 seconds.
X Press & to select Headlamp mode.
If you have activated the delayed switch-off
X Press the W or X button to set the function and switched off the engine, the fol-
mode for the headlamps to Manual or Con‐ lowing remain lit:
stant (daytime driving lights). Rthe side lamps
X Press the &, V or U button to Rthe licence plate lighting
select a different display. Rthe foglamps

Switching the surround lighting on or off
If the surround lighting is switched on, the
following lights will be switched on automat-
ically in the dark after you have unlocked the menus.
vehicle using the key: X Press the W or X button to select the
Rthe side lamps Lighting submenu.
Rthe licence plate lighting X Press the & button to select Headl.
Rthe foglamps delay switch-off.
The surround lighting switches off automati- X Press the W or X button to activate
cally after 40 seconds or when the driver's or deactivate the Headl. delay switch-
door is opened. off function.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel X Press the &, V or U button to
to select the Settings menu. select a different display.
X Press & to call up the selection of sub- To deactivate the delayed switch-off tempo-
menus. rarily:
X Press the W or X button to select the X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to
Lighting submenu. position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Press & to select Surround light‐ X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
ing. lock and back to position 0.
The delayed switch-off is deactivated.
Z
Delayed switch-off is reactivated the next ting is selected, the next stored station is
time you start the engine. selected.

Activating/deactivating the interior light-
ing delayed switch-off select a different display.
When you activate the Inter. lighting Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC
delay.sw.off function and remove the key You can set permanent SPEEDTRONIC
from the ignition lock, the interior lighting (Y page 132) using the Speed limit
remains on for 10 seconds. (tyres) function.
to select the Settings menu. to select the Settings menu.
X Press the W or X button to select the menus.
Lighting submenu. X Press the W or X button to select the
X Press the & button to select Inter. Vehicle submenu.
lighting delay.sw.off. X Press & to select Speed limit
X Press the W or X button to activate (tyres).
or deactivate the Inter. lighting X Press W or X to adjust permanent
delay.sw.off function. SPEEDTRONIC in increments of 10
X Press the &, V or U button to (230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off setting
select a different display. switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off.
Vehicle select a different display.
Setting the radio station selection Switching the automatic locking feature
This function is only available in conjunction on/off
with Audio 5. When you activate the Automatic door
The Audio Search allows you to set whether lock function, your vehicle will be centrally
a new station is searched for every time you locked above a speed of approximately
switch on the radio or a previously stored sta- 15 km/h.
tion is selected.
i For further information on the automatic
X Press the V or U button on the steer- locking feature, see (Y page 60).
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
menus.
Vehicle submenu.
Vehicle submenu.
X Press the & button to select Audio
X Press & to select Automatic door
search.
lock.
X Press W or X to switch Automatic
Frequency or Memory setting.
If the Frequency setting is selected, the door lock on or off.
station search is started. If the Memory set- X Press the &, V or U button to
Convenience

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
ing function on/off
When you activate the Fold in mirrors
when locking function, the exterior mirrors
are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you
unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's
or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors
fold out again.
If you have switched the function on and you
Trip computer "From start" (example)
fold the exterior mirrors in using the button
: Distance
on the door (Y page 75), they will not fold out
automatically. The exterior mirrors can then ; Time
only be folded out using the button on the = Average speed
door. ? Average fuel consumption
The From start trip computer is reset auto-
to select the Settings menu. matically when
X Press the & button to select submenus. Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
X Press the W or X button to select the than four hours.
Convenience submenu. R999 hours have been exceeded.
X Press & to select Fold mirr. in R9999 kilometres have been exceeded.
when locking. The From reset trip computer is automati-
X Press W or X to activate/deactivate cally reset if the trip exceeds 9,999 hours or
the Fold mirr. in when locking func- 99,999 kilometres.
tion.
X Press the &, V or U button to Resetting values
select a different display. X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the trip computer menu.
X Press & or * to select the function
Trip computer menu
that you wish to reset.
Trip computer "From start" or "From X Press and hold the reset button on the left
reset" of the instrument cluster until the values
The values in the From start submenu refer have reverted to "0".
to the start of your journey, while those in the
From resetsubmenu refer to the last time Calling up the range
you reset (Y page 159) this submenu. X Press V or U on the steering wheel
X Press V or U on the steering wheel to select the trip computer menu.
to select the trip computer menu. X Press & or * to select Range:.
X Press & or * to select From start The multifunction display shows the esti-
or From reset. mated range of the vehicle, based on the
current driving style and the fuel level. If
there is only a small amount of fuel remain-
Z
ing in the fuel tank, a vehicle refuelling X Switch on the mobile phone and audio sys-
C appears instead of the range. tem or COMAND APS (see the separate
operating instructions).
Displaying the current fuel consump- Switch on the mobile phone and audio sys-
tion tem (see the separate operating instruc-
tions).
to select the trip computer menu.
to select the Telephone menu.
X Press & or * to select Consump‐
tion:. You will see one of the following display mes-
The current fuel consumption is displayed. sages in the multifunction display:
RPIN: the mobile phone has been placed in
the mobile phone bracket and the PIN has
not been entered.
X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, LIN-
GUATRONIC, the audio system or
COMAND APS.
The mobile phone will search for a network.
RReady or the name of the network provider:
the mobile phone has found a network and
is ready to receive.
RNo Service: no network is available.
Telephone menu Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the
Introduction
Telephone menu, a display message appears
Functions and displays are dependent on the in the multifunction display, for example:
optional equipment installed in your vehicle.
You can place your mobile phone in the
mobile phone bracket (Y page 201), or set
up a Bluetooth® connection to the audio sys-
tem or COMAND APS (see the separate oper-
ating instructions).
G Risk of accident
Observe the legal requirements of the country
in which you are currently driving regarding
the use of mobile phones in the vehicle.
If it is permitted to use mobile phones while X Press 6 on the steering wheel to accept
the vehicle is in motion, you should only use an incoming call.
them when the road and traffic conditions
allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from
If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can
the traffic conditions, cause an accident and still accept a call.
injure yourself and others.
Rejecting or ending a call

X Press the ~ button on the steering
wheel.
If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can
still accept a call.
Dialling a number from the phone book

You can enter new telephone numbers into
the phone book via the mobile phone (see the
separate operating instructions). If your
mobile phone is operational, you can select
and dial a number from the phone book at any
time.
desired name.
To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the
& or * button for longer than one
second.
X Press 6 to start dialling.
or
X If you do not want to make a call, press the
~ button.
Redialling
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialled in the redial memory.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
desired name or number.
X Press 6 to start dialling.
Z
162 Display messages
Display messages
Hiding display messages

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
X Press the V, U, & or * button on the steering wheel to select another display.
or
X Press the reset button on the instrument cluster (Y page 22).
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red.
You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows
these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Owner's Manual.
Message memory menu

The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages
in the message memory menu.
The message memory menu is only shown if any display messages have been stored.
X Press the V or U button repeatedly, until either the original menu or the message
memory menu is shown.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 messages.
X Press the & or * button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Display messages 163
Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
7 G Risk of injury
If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt
buckle has been released on a rear seat while the vehicle is in
motion.
X Ask occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts.
For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat
belts: (Y page 37).
ESP G Risk of accident
unavailable See ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) is temporarily not available.
Owner's Manual The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
The following systems have also been deactivated:
RBAS (Brake Assist)
Rthe steering assistant STEER CONTROL
Rhill start assist
Rthe tyre pressure loss warning system
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above.
X Carefully drive a short distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
ESP® is not available due to undervoltage. The battery might not

be charging, for example.
RBAS
Rhill start assist

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z

ESP G Risk of accident

inoperative See ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
Owner's Manual
RBAS
Rhill start assist

+ G Risk of injury
Restraint system The restraint systems are malfunctioning.
malfunction Con‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
sult workshop
Brakes

ABS G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP unavaila‐ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
ble See Owner's gram) are temporarily unavailable. The self-diagnosis function
Manual might not be complete, for example.
RBAS (Brake Assist)
Rhill start assist

functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Carefully drive a short distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
G Risk of accident
ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable due to undervoltage.
The battery might not be charging, for example.
RBAS
Rhill start assist

Z

ABS G Risk of accident

ABS, ESP inopera‐ ABS and ESP® are not available due to a fault.
tive See Owner's
Manual The following systems have also been deactivated:
RBAS
Rhill start assist

! You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
Release parking X Release the parking brake
brake
J G Risk of accident
Check brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addi-
level tion, the red J warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up and a warning tone sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Brake wear
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Cornering light
(Y page 83).
left
or or
Cornering light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
right
b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.

Dipped-beam left
(Y page 83).
or
Dipped-beam right or
b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
Trailer tail lamp
left or
or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Trailer tail lamp
right
b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.

Trailer turn sig‐
nal left or
or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Trailer turn sig‐
nal right
b The trailer brake lamp is faulty.

Trailer brake lamp
or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Turn signal rear
(Y page 83).
left
or or
Turn signal rear X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
right
Z

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Turn signal front
(Y page 83).
left
or or
Turn signal front X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
right
b The turn signal in the left-hand and/or right-hand exterior mirror

is faulty.
Turn signal left X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
mirror
(Y page 83).
or
Turn signal right or
mirror X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The third brake lamp is faulty.

3rd brake lamp
(Y page 83).
or
b The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty.

Brake lamp left
(Y page 83).
or
Brake lamp right or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty.

Tail lamp left
(Y page 83).
or
Tail lamp right or
b The left or right-hand high beam is faulty.

Main-beam left
(Y page 83).
or
Main-beam right or

b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.
Licence plate lamp
(Y page 83).
or
b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty.

Fog-lamp left
(Y page 83).
or
Fog-lamp right or
b The rear foglamp is faulty.

Rear foglamp
(Y page 83).
or
b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.

Parking lamp front
(Y page 83).
left
or or
Parking lamp front X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
right
b The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty.

Reversing lamp left
(Y page 83).
or
Reversing lamp or
right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

b The light sensor is faulty.

X Switch off the daytime driving lights in the on-board computer
AUTO lights inoper‐
(Y page 156).
ative
X Switch the lights on and off using the light switch.
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to $ or c.
or
X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to
the stop.
Engine
; Some electronic systems are unable to send information to the

on-board computer. The following systems may be malfunction-
ing:
Rcoolant temperature display
Rrev counter
Rcruise control or SPEEDTRONIC display
+ The coolant level is too low.

X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing
Top up coolant See
so (Y page 207).
Owner's Manual
X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

? The coolant is too hot.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
Coolant Stop car,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
turn eng. off
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the
engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
The poly-V-belt may have torn.

X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the
engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-start driving.
Z

# The battery is not being charged.

Possible causes are:
Ra faulty alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
# The on-board voltage is too low.

X Start the engine.
X Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
# The on-board voltage is too high.

X Have the alternator checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
4 Vehicles with a petrol engine: the oil level is too low.

X Check the oil level (Y page 205).
Engine oil level
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 207).
Check level
X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs top-
ping up more often than usual.
4 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the oil level is too low.

Add 1.0 litre of
engine oil when
next refuelling X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs top-
ping up more often than usual.

4 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the oil level is too low. There is a
risk of engine damage.
Engine oil level X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
Stop car, turn
eng. off
X Top up the engine oil (Y page 207) and check the oil level
(Y page 205).
4 Vehicles with a diesel engine: you have added too much engine
oil. There is a risk of damage to the engine or to the catalytic
Engine oil level converter.
Reduce oil level X Have the excess oil siphoned off at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Observe the legal requirements.
4 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the measuring system is faulty.

Cannot measure oil
level
4 Vehicles with a petrol engine: the oil pressure is too low. There is
a risk of engine damage.
Engine oil pres‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
sure Stop car,
turn eng. off
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
Reserve fuel level
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.
· Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Clean fuel filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Driving systems

Park Assist The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
cancelled fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
X Use Active Park Assist again later (Y page 136).
Park Assist You have just performed a large number of turning or parking
inoperative manoeuvres.
Active Park Assist will become available again after approximately
10 minutes (Y page 136).
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch off and restart the engine.
X If the warning message does not disappear: consult a qualified
PARKTRONIC is faulty.
¯ SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are faulty.

SPEEDTRONIC inop‐
erative
120 km/h The maximum speed has been exceeded30.
Maximum speed X Drive slower.
exceeded
30 Only for certain countries.

Tyres

Tyre pressure G Risk of accident
Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 242).
X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct
tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 241).
Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
Then restart Run sage and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 241).
Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Vehicle

Shift to N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
to start position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Transmission The multifunction display additionally shows an F in the transmis-

Consult workshop sion position display.
Safe operation of AUTOTRONIC can no longer be fully guaranteed.
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
B The tailgate is open.

X Close the tailgate.
C At least one door is open.

X Close all doors.
No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
~ You have not yet logged on to your mobile phone.

X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.
Enter PIN
~ The Bluetooth® connection between your mobile phone and the

audio system or COMAND APS is not activated.
Bluetooth ready
X If desired, activate the Bluetooth® connection between the
mobile phone and the audio system or COMAND APS (see the
separate operating instructions).
~ Your mobile phone is not inserted in the bracket.

X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket (Y page 201).
No telephone

¥ Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps: the washer fluid level in the
washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
Top up washer fluid X
Top up the washer fluid (Y page 208).
Y G Risk of accident
Power steering mal‐ There is no power assistance for the steering. You will need to use
function See Own‐ more force to steer.
er's Manual STEER CONTROL is also deactivated.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Key
+ You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct key.
Key does not
belong to vehicle
+ The key needs to be replaced.

You need a new key
Z
178 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Brakes

& You are driving with the parking brake applied.
The red brake system X Release the parking brake
warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
& G Risk of accident

The red brake system There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ning. A warning tone attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds. under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.
Seat belts

7 The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
The red seat belt warn- to fasten their seat belts.
ing lamp lights up for X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 35).
six seconds after the
engine starts31.
7 G Risk of injury
After starting the The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
engine, the red seat
belt warning lamp lights X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 35).
up. In addition, a warn- The warning tone ceases.
ing tone sounds for up
to 6 seconds.31

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 179

7 G Risk of injury
The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
ing lamp lights up after
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 35).
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or The warning lamp goes out.
the front-passenger
door is closed. G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
7 G Risk of injury
The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At
ing lamp flashes and an the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly
intermittent audible driven faster than 25 km/h.
warning sounds.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 35).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning
ceases.
G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time,
you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster
than 25 km/h.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning
ceases.
Z
Safety systems

! G Risk of accident
The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault.
lamp is lit while the
Therefore, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist),
engine is running.
STEER CONTROL, hill start assist and the tyre pressure loss warn-
ing system, for example, are also deactivated.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-
mission, will not be available.
! G Risk of accident
The yellow ABS warning The on-board voltage is too low. ABS has been deactivated due to
lamp is lit while the undervoltage.
engine is running.
Therefore, ESP®, BAS, STEER CONTROL, hill start assist and the
tyre pressure loss warning system, for example, are also deacti-
vated.
X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. the rear window
heating or interior lighting.
ABS will be available again as soon as the vehicle's on-board
electrical system voltage increases.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Have the battery and alternator checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 181

d G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP® warn- ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
ing lamp flashes while skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
the vehicle is in motion.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.
X Release the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
d G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP® warn- ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilise
ing lamp is lit while the the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
engine is running.
RABS and BAS
Rhill start assist

display.
+ G Risk of injury
The red SRS warning The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The airbags or belt ten-
lamp is lit while the sioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of
engine is running. an accident, not be triggered at all.
+ The electrical connector on the removable front-passenger seat is

The red SRS warning detached.
lamp is lit while the X Attach the connector to the coupling on the seat
engine is running. In (Y page 187).
addition, the 4
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp
flashes in the centre
console and a warning
tone sounds.
Z
Engine

; There may be a fault, for example:
The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management
nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)
Rthe fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
; Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry
The yellow engine diag- (Y page 122).
nostics warning lamp X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
lights up while the If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emer-
engine is running. gency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be
checked.
The yellow reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
warning lamp lights up X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
while the engine is run-
ning.
183

Loading guidelines ............................ 184
Stowage areas .................................. 185
Features ............................................. 198
Stowing and features

184 Loading guidelines
Vehicle equipment Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
i This Owner's Manual describes all models Ralways place the load against the rear seat
and all standard and optional equipment of backrests or the seat cushions if these
your vehicle available at the time of publi- have been folded forwards.
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country- Rthe maximum load capacity of the stowage
specific differences are possible. Please well under the luggage compartment floor
note that your vehicle may not be equipped is 25 kg.
with all features described. This also Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
applies to safety-relevant systems and seats if possible.

functions. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp
edges for protection.
Loading guidelines
i Load restraints are available at any quali-
G Risk of injury fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
Secure and position the load as described in Benz Service Centre.
the loading guidelines. ! Do not position the load on one part of the
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could folding luggage compartment floor only.
be injured by the load being thrown around in The maximum load capacity of the folding
the event of sharp braking, a sudden change luggage compartment floor is 100 kg.
in direction or an accident. Spread the weight evenly to avoid damag-
You will find further information in the "Secur- ing the luggage compartment floor. Place a
ing a load" section. solid board under the load if necessary.
Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, Please note that the load on the luggage
the load will increase the risk of injury in the compartment floor will be increased when
event of an accident. the load is lashed down.
G Risk of poisoning
Keep the tailgate closed when the engine is
running. Otherwise, you could be poisoned by
exhaust fumes entering the vehicle.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-

cle are dependent on the distribution of the
load within the vehicle. For this reason, you
should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
: Rear sill protector
Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight ! Do not sit or stand on the loading sill when
or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle loading. Never place any heavy loads on the
(including occupants). loading sill. This can cause serious and per-
Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as pos- manent damage to the bumper.
sible and as low down in the luggage com- The loading sill protector serves only to
partment as possible. protect the painted surface.
Stowage areas 185
Stowage areas X To open: pull handle : and open the glove

compartment flap.
Stowage compartments X To close: fold the glove compartment flap
Important safety notes upwards until it engages.
G Risk of injury Spectacles compartment

The stowage compartments must be closed There is a spectacles compartment in the roof
when items are stored in them. Luggage nets lining on the driver's side.
are not designed to secure heavy items of

luggage.
You or other vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident
Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be

placed in the luggage net.
Front stowage compartments X To open: pull down spectacles compart-

ment : by the handle.
Glove compartment
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, Stowage compartment in the centre con-
you will find an AUX-IN jack or a Media sole
Interface installed in the glove compart- If your vehicle is not equipped with the smok-
ment. A Media Interface is a universal inter- er's package, a stowage compartment with a
face for portable audio equipment, e.g. for 12 V power socket is fitted in place of the
an iPod® or USB device (see the separate ashtray.
Audio or COMAND APS operating instruc-
tions).
i The glove compartment flap contains
stowage spaces for coins, pens, and credit
and service cards.
i The glove compartment can be ventilated
(Y page 103).
X To open: slide cover : forwards.
Z
186 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment/telephone com-

partment under the armrest
X To open: slide armrest : forwards.
Stowage compartment in the rear com-

X To open: press lightly on the cover of stow-
partment
age compartment :.
Stowage compartment : opens.
Stowage boxes under the front seats

The stowage boxes can bear a maximum load
of 2.5 kg.
X To open: pull out the top of stowage com-

partment : by the edge of the handle.
Stowage compartments in the luggage

compartment
The illustration shows the driver's seat G Risk of injury
X To open: raise the stowage box slightly and The stowage boxes can bear a maximum load
pull it out using recessed handle :. of 1.5 kg. The objects in the left-hand stowage
compartment should only be placed in the
designated spaces and secured using the
Rear stowage compartments appropriate holders. Otherwise, the stowage
compartment could open and you and other
Stowage compartment under the rear
vehicle occupants could be injured by objects
armrest
being thrown around in the event of sharp
G Risk of injury braking, a sudden change in direction or an
Make sure that nobody can become trapped accident.
when you slide the armrest.
The stowage compartments are located in the
luggage compartment on the left and right-
hand sides.
Stowage areas 187
i The left-hand stowage compartment con-

tains the first-aid kit, the warning triangle
and TIREFIT.

X To open: fold the left backrest forwards
(Y page 191).
X Slide cover : up and to the side.
Right-hand stowage compartment
Luggage nets
G Risk of injury
Only place lightweight objects in the luggage
net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharp-
edged or fragile objects. The luggage net can-
not secure the objects sufficiently in the event
of an accident.
Luggage nets are located in the front-

Left-hand stowage compartment passenger footwell and on the back of the
driver's and the front-passenger seat.
X To open: turn handle : in the direction of
the arrow and fold down cover ;.
Stowage compartment behind the back-

Removable front-passenger seat
rest Removing the front-passenger seat
The stowage compartment is located behind
! To avoid damage, the head restraint must
the left-hand backrest.
be pushed in fully before the front-
i The jack, the wheel chock and the vehicle passenger seat is removed.
tool kit are located in the stowage com-
partment.
Z
188 Stowage areas
! Do not operate the lever until you have X Open cable box = and place connec-
pulled out the connector. Operating the tor : inside.
lever will otherwise cause damage to X Close cable box =.
mechanical and electronic components.
X Move the front-passenger seat to its rear- G Risk of injury
most position. The front-passenger seat which has been
X Disconnect connector :. removed contains an active sidebag. Do not
A signal sounds. The lock for lever ; is attach a power source to the connector on the
seat, otherwise the airbag could inflate. Store
released. If the engine is running, the
the seat out of the reach of children.

4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp flashes and the + warning lamp
lights up after a short time. Fitting the front-passenger seat
X Move the front-passenger seat to its centre
G Risk of injury
position.
The mounting cups must be free from dirt and
It is only possible to remove the seat with- other items in order for the front-passenger
out tilting it when it is in this position. seat to engage securely.
X Place connector : under the seat in such
You must connect up the connector, so that
a way that the hose does not get caught on the front-passenger airbag can deploy in the
the seat frame. event of an accident.
If it is not connected and the engine is run-
ning, the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
warning lamp flashes and the + warning
lamp lights up after a short time.
X Swing lever ; forwards and pull upwards.

The seat slides out of the front mounting
cups.
X Take hold of the seat at the back of the
backrest and at the front edge of the seat : Rear mounting cups
cushion. ; Front mounting cups
X Guide the seat through the front-passenger
= Connector
door opening.
? Cable box
Stowage areas 189
A Lever X To fold forward: press the backrest back

B Seat frame slightly.
X Pull release handle : and fold the back-
X Take connector = out of cable box ? and
rest fully onto the seat cushion until it
place it at the front. engages.
X Take hold of the seat at the back of the
backrest and at the front edge of the seat X To fold back: push the backrest down
cushion. slightly and pull release handle :.
X Guide the seat through the front-passenger X Fold the seat backrest back until it
engages.

door opening.
X Move the seat into position over the mount-
ing cups.
X Insert the seat hook into rear mounting
Through-loading facility
cups :. Opening/closing the through-loading
X Push the front of the seat down until it facility
engages.
Lever A springs back to its starting posi- G Risk of injury
tion. Only then is the seat correctly locked Do not transport unsecured objects in the
in position. through-loading facility.
X Route connector = over seat frame B. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
X Insert connector = into the coupling on
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
the seat. ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
G Risk of injury dent.
Before starting off, make sure that the seat To enable you to use the maximum through-
has engaged properly. loading opening and to prevent the armrest
from becoming dirty or being damaged by the
load, the armrest should be removed
Folding backrest on the front- (Y page 190).
passenger seat
X To open: fold down seat armrest :.
Z
190 Stowage areas
X Pull release handle ; upwards and hold it

securely.
X Pull armrest : out towards the front.
Hold the side of armrest : as you do this,

otherwise the cup holders open.
i Release handle ; remains in the open
position after armrest : has been
removed.
! Do not press the release handle down

X Slide locking mechanism = in the direc- when the armrest has been removed, oth-
erwise the armrest mechanism could be
tion of the arrow.
damaged.
X Swing cover ; to the side.
Cover ; is held open by a magnet. Fitting the armrest

X To close: swing cover ; in the luggage
compartment back until it engages.
X Fold the armrest up fully if necessary.
Removing the armrest
X Align the armrest.

X Slide the armrest back until it engages.
The release handle drops down. Ensure
that red surface : of the release handle is
no longer visible. Only then is the armrest
locked in place.
X Fold down armrest :.
G Risk of injury
The armrests must be locked in position when
the vehicle is being driven.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could
be injured by the armrest being thrown
around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden
change in direction or an accident.
Nobody should travel in the vehicle sitting in
the centre position in the rear compartment
if the armrest has been removed.
Stowage areas 191
! Do not close the armrest unless it has

been locked in position, otherwise the arm-
rest mechanism could be damaged.
Enlarging the luggage compartment

G Risk of injury

as you fold the backrests forward. X Fold left-hand or right-hand seat cush-
! To prevent damage, before the backrests ion ; forward.
are folded forward:
Rthe head restraints must be pushed in
fully.
Rthe front seats must be as far forwards
as possible.
Rthe seat cushions must be folded forward
or removed.
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
ests can be folded forwards separately to
increase the luggage compartment capacity.
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle
Folding the rear bench seat forwards = on backrest.
Corresponding seat backrest ? is
released.
X Fold the backrest forwards until it rests on
the hinge fixtures.
X Move the front seats to the desired posi-
tions.
Folding back the rear bench seat
X Insert the seat belt into belt retainer :.
Z
192 Stowage areas
X Fold the backrest back until it engages.

Red lock verification indicator : is no lon-
ger visible.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
X Swing the seat cushion back.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

(Y page 71).
X Fold the left-hand or right-hand seat cush-
X Move the front seats to the desired posi-
ion ; forward.
tions.
If red lock verification indicator : is visible,
this means that the backrest is not engaged.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that the seat backrest is correctly
engaged. The red lock verification indicators
on the left and right sides should no longer be
visible. If they are visible, the backrests are
not locked in position.
Occupants could otherwise be injured in the
event of an accident, e.g. by objects being
thrown forwards through the vehicle interior X Grasp release handle ? and pull seat cush-
from the luggage compartment. ion = upwards.
X Remove seat cushion =.
Removing the seat cushions
X If the backrest is to be removed: fold down

X Insert the seat belt into seat-belt hinge A.
extender :. If the backrest is only to be folded down:
leave hinge A as a support for the backrest
in the position shown above.
i Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit or the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel:
Stowage areas 193
You can store the seat cushions under the X Press seat belt buckle : on the grooved
variable luggage compartment floor. surface and remove seat belt buckle :
! Vehicles with spare wheel, loudspeaker from holder =.
system or sound system: i When the ignition is switched on, a mes-
You cannot store any seat cushions under sage is displayed for the corresponding
the variable luggage compartment floor. rear seats in the upper multifunction dis-
play. If, for example, both connectors are
Fitting the seat cushions removed, the message: 7No rear
seat belt engaged appears.

X Fold hinge A upwards if necessary. Only
then can the seat cushion be slid in. X Stow connector : in connector
X Slide the seat cushion onto the fixtures holder ; in the vehicle floor.
until it engages. X Pull lever = upwards and hold it securely.
i For easier alignment of the cushions,
observe the arrows on the rear of the seat
cushions.
Removing the backrest

X Fold the seat cushion forward
(Y page 192).
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-

dle ? on backrest A.
Corresponding seat backrest A is
released.
X Fold backrest A forwards past the vertical
to an angle of approximately 20˚.
X Hold backrest A with your free hand and
lift the backrest by pulling lever =.
i For greater convenience, there is a recess
on the rear of the ⅔ backrest which makes
it easier to grasp the backrest.
X Remove backrest A from the vehicle
through the rear door.
Warning symbol on the connector of the rear seat

belt status indicator
Z
194 Stowage areas
Fitting the backrest G Risk of injury

Make sure that the seat backrest is correctly
engaged. The red lock verification indicators
on the left and right sides should no longer be
visible. If they are visible, the backrests are
not locked in position.
Occupants could otherwise be injured in the
event of an accident, e.g. by objects being
thrown forwards through the vehicle interior
from the luggage compartment.
X Fold back the seat cushion.

X Place the backrest, starting with the seat's
front feet, onto the locking bolts in
recesses :. Securing a load
Lashing eyelets
G Risk of injury
Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets
evenly.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
X Fold the backrest back until it engages. Please observe the loading guidelines.
Red lock verification indicator ; is no lon-
ger visible. Observe the following notes on securing
X Make sure that the lever is lying flat on the loads:
vehicle floor. Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
X Take the connector out of the recesses on Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
the vehicle floor. a load, as these are only intended as an
X Insert the connector back into the lever anti-slip protection for light loads.
until you hear it engage. Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp
i Make sure that you insert the connector edges or corners.

correctly into the lever, as the instrument Rpad sharp edges for protection.
cluster will otherwise no longer inform you
whether the rear seat belts are fastened.
X Fit the seat cushions as required.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 71).
If red lock verification indicator ; is visible,
this means the backrest is not engaged.
Stowage areas 195
Securing loads in the luggage compart- Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
ment edge of the door trim.
Rlong loads may only be placed low down
and towards the front of the front-
passenger footwell.
! Load restraints must not be fastened to
the front right-hand mounting cup. Other-
wise, the contact switch for the front-
passenger seat could be damaged.

Securing a light load using a retaining net
X Place the retaining net over the load.
X Engage the retaining net hooks in the lash-
X Secure the load using lashing eyelets : or ing eyelets.
the mounting cups for the seats, if the seats
have been removed.
Bag hook
Securing a load when the seats have been
G Risk of injury
removed
Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do
not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged
or fragile objects. When braking sharply,
changing direction quickly or in the event of
an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the
items sufficiently. This could result in injury to
yourself or others.
Rear seat removed ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
X Guide the load restraints in a cross pattern of 5 kg. Do not use it to secure a load.
over the load, as shown in the illustration. There is a bag hook in the luggage compart-
X Secure the load using the lashing eyelets ment on the left-hand side.
or the mounting cups on the seats.
G Risk of injury
Always stow the load so that it does not inter-
fere with driving the vehicle.
Avoid obstructing the driver's line-of-sight.
The load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the door trim if the front-passenger
seat has been removed.
Pad sharp edges for protection. This will
reduce the risk of lacerations and prevent the
load restraints from wearing. X To open: press bag hook : in the direction
of the arrow.
Observe the following notes:
Bag hook : slides out.
X To close: press bag hook : until it
engages.
Z
196 Stowage areas
Luggage compartment cover i You can fold up the part of the luggage
compartment cover which remains visible.
G Risk of accident and injury Fitting/removing the luggage compart-
ment cover
The luggage compartment cover is not a
restraint system. Secure the load under the
luggage compartment cover by suitable
means. Make sure that the luggage compart-
ment cover is engaged securely. If luggage is
not sufficiently secured, it can be thrown over

the backrest into the passenger compart-
ment, for instance during heavy braking, sud-
den changes of direction or in the event of an
accident. You could cause an accident or
cause injury to yourself and others.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that X To remove: make sure that luggage com-
you do not stack the load in the luggage partment cover : is rolled up.
compartment higher than the lower edge of X Press handle ; on the right underside to
the side windows. Do not place heavy the left.
objects on top of the luggage compartment
X Remove luggage compartment cover :.
cover.
The luggage compartment cover is located X To fit: attach luggage compartment
behind the rear bench seat backrest. cover : to the opening on the left-hand
side.
Extending and retracting the luggage X Press handle ; to the right.
compartment cover X Allow luggage compartment cover : to
engage in the appropriate recess.
EASY-VARIO system
The following functions are combined in the
EASY-VARIO system:
R"Removing the backrest" (Y page 193)
R"Removable front-passenger seat"
(Y page 187)
R"Folding backrest on the front-passenger
X To extend: pull luggage compartment seat" (Y page 189), except on vehicles
cover : back and clip it into the retainers which have electrically adjustable driver
on the left and right. and front-passenger seats, and in conjunc-
X To retract: unhook luggage compartment tion with sports seats
cover : from the retainers on the left and
right and guide it forwards by the grab han-
dle until it is fully retracted.
Stowage areas 197
Stowage well underneath the luggage X To open: retract the luggage compartment
compartment floor cover (Y page 196) and swing the visible
part upwards.
Important safety notes X Pull handle : until it is vertical, then swing
G Risk of injury luggage compartment floor ; upwards.

You should always close the luggage com-
partment floor if you are transporting objects
in the stowage well under the luggage com-
partment floor.

Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.
G Warning
Make sure that the stowage compartment is X Press bag hook =(Y page 195).
properly closed if you have stowed items in it. Bag hook = slides out.
In the event of an accident, during heavy brak- X Place luggage compartment floor ; onto
ing or a sudden change of direction, items bag hook =.
may be thrown around the vehicle interior,
causing injury to vehicle occupants.
X To close: press in bag hook = until it
engages.
! The maximum load capacity of the stow- X Swing the luggage compartment floor
age well under the luggage compartment downwards.
floor is 25 kg.
Setting the height of the luggage com-
Opening/closing the luggage compart- partment floor
ment floor
The stowage well under the luggage compart-
ment floor can be increased or decreased in
size as necessary. To do this, you can lock the
floor at two different heights. The upper catch
gives a flat load surface when the rear bench
seat is folded forward.
i Make sure that there are no objects on

the luggage compartment floor when it is
opened, as the luggage compartment floor
can otherwise drop to the lowest position.
Z
198 Features
X To lift: raise luggage compartment ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

floor ; using handle : in the direction of only use roof carriers that have been tested
arrow = and tug it upwards sharply. and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
X Lower luggage compartment floor ; This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-
again. To do this, push the luggage com- cle.
partment floor away so that it engages in Position the load on the roof carrier in such
the guide on the upper level. a way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-
Luggage compartment floor ; engages in age even when it is in motion.
the upper position. Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof carrier is fitted

X To lower: raise luggage compartment you can:
floor ; slightly using handle : and tug it
Rraise the panorama louvred sliding sun-
briefly towards you.
roof fully
X Lower luggage compartment floor ; again
Ropen the tailgate fully
slowly. Whilst doing so, press the luggage
compartment floor into the lower level.
Attaching the roof carrier
Luggage compartment floor ; engages in
the lower position.
Roof carrier
An incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack or
load could become detached from the vehi-
cle. These objects might then be thrown
around and could injure you or others or X Fold covers : upwards.
cause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/ski X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-
rack manufacturer's installation instructions
age points under covers :.
and special instructions for use.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of
instructions.
gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.
You must always observe the maximum roof
load of 75 kg. Always adapt your driving style
to the prevailing road, traffic and weather Features
conditions and drive with particular care if the Cup holders
roof is laden.
G Risk of injury
G Risk of injury
Only use the roof carrier when the roof is
closed. The roof carrier or the load could Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle
endanger the occupants of the vehicle when is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants
the roof is open. could be injured by objects being thrown
around if you:
Features 199
Rbrake sharply Sun visors

Sun visor overview
Only use the cup holders for containers of a G Risk of accident

suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise, Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered
the drinks could spill. while driving. You could otherwise be dazzled,
Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. which may impair your view of traffic condi-
Otherwise, you may scald yourself. tions and as a result could cause an accident.

Cup holder in the centre console
: Mirror light
; Bracket
: Cup holders = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
A Mirror cover
! Do not sit or lean on the armrest when it
is folded down as you could otherwise dam- Vanity mirror in the sun visor
age it.
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
! Do not fold the armrest up unless the cup is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover
holder is closed. Otherwise, the cup holder A has been folded up.
could be damaged.
Glare from the side
X Fold down the sun visor.
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X To open: press the front of the cup holder.
The cup holder extends automatically.
Z
200 Features
Ashtray Cigarette lighter

Ashtray in the cockpit G Risk of injury and fire
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob.
Otherwise, you might burn yourself.
Make sure that children travelling in the vehi-
cle are not able to injure themselves on the
hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it.
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it

engages.
X To remove the insert: lift insert ; up and
out.
X To refit the insert: press insert ; into the
holder until it engages. Centre console, front
Ashtray in the rear compartment lock.
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
12 V sockets
Points to observe before use
The sockets can be used for accessories with
X To open: pull ashtray : out by its top a maximum power consumption of 180 W
edge. (15 A), e.g. lamps or chargers for mobile
X To remove the insert: pull out the insert phones.
beyond the stop. If you use the sockets for long periods when
X To refit the insert: replace the insert from the engine is switched off, the battery may
above. discharge.
X Press the insert into the bracket until it
engages. Socket in the cockpit
! The socket is not suitable for operating
the electric air pump.
Features 201
A socket is fitted in the centre console on X Open the stowage compartment

vehicles with the non-smoker's package. (Y page 186).
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
Mobile phone
G Risk of accident
Observe the legal requirements of the country

in which you are currently driving regarding
operating mobile communications equipment
in a vehicle.
If it is permitted by law to operate communi-
X Lift up the cover of socket :. cations equipment while the vehicle is in
motion, you must only do so if the traffic sit-
Socket in the rear compartment uation permits. Otherwise, you could be dis-
tracted from the traffic conditions, cause an
accident and injure yourself and others.
Two-way radios and fax equipment used with-
out low-reflection exterior aerials can inter-
fere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby
jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle
and your safety. Therefore, you must only use
this equipment if it is correctly connected to
a separate reflection-free exterior aerial.
G Risk of injury
X Pull stowage compartment : out using Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the
the handle edge.
health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
into account current scientific discussions
relating to the possible health risk posed by
Socket in the luggage compartment electromagnetic fields.
The socket is located in the left-hand stowage
To ensure optimum reception quality for
compartment in the luggage compartment.
mobile phones in the vehicle and to minimise
mutual influences between the vehicle elec-
tronics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz
recommends the use of an approved exterior
aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the elec-
tromagnetic fields generated by a wireless
device to the exterior of the vehicle; the field
strength within the vehicle interior is lower
than in a vehicle that does not have an exte-
rior aerial.
i There are various mobile phone brackets
that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some
Z
202 Features
cases, these are country-specific. You can Do not place floormats on top of one another.
obtain these mobile phone brackets from a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
The functions and services available when
you use the phone depend on your mobile
phone model and service provider.
X To insert a mobile phone: open the tele-
phone compartment (Y page 186).
X Place the mobile phone bracket into the

pre-installed bracket (see the separate
mobile phone bracket installation instruc-
tions). X Slide the seat backwards.
X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile X To fit: place the floormat in position.
phone bracket (see the separate mobile X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
phone bracket installation instructions).
If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile
X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-
phone bracket, you can speak to the person ers ;.
you are calling using the hands-free system. X Remove the floormat.
You can operate the telephone using the

6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel. You can operate other mobile Retrofitted anti-glare film
phone functions via the on-board computer Anti-glare film retrofitted to the inside of the
(Y page 160). windows can interfere with radio/mobile
When you take the key out of the ignition lock, phone reception. This is particularly the case
the mobile phone stays on but you can no for conductive or metallic-coated films. Infor-
longer use the hands-free system. mation about anti-glare film can be obtained
If you are making a call and you would like to from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
take the key out of the ignition lock, first
remove the mobile phone from the bracket.
Otherwise, the call will be ended.
Floormat on the driver's side

G Risk of accident
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
around the pedals when floormats are used,
and that the floormats are properly secured.
The floormats must be correctly secured at all
times using retainers and press-studs.
Before you drive off, check the floormats and
secure if necessary. A floormat which is not
properly secured can slip and, thereby, inter-
fere with the movement of the pedals.
203

Engine compartment ........................ 204
Maintenance ...................................... 209
Care .................................................... 210
Maintenance and care

204 Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment Vehicles with a petrol engine: The elec-

tronic ignition system uses high voltage. For
i This Owner's Manual describes all models this reason, you must never touch ignition
and all standard and optional equipment of system components (ignition coil, ignition
your vehicle available at the time of publi- cables, spark plug connectors or test socket)
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country- while:
specific differences are possible. Please Rthe engine is running
note that your vehicle may not be equipped Rthe engine is being started
Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine
functions. is being cranked by hand
You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.

Engine compartment Vehicles with a diesel engine: The elec-
tronic injection control uses high voltage. For
Bonnet this reason, you must never touch injection
Opens the bonnet system components while:
Rthe engine is running
G Risk of accident
Rthe engine is being started
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
Rthe ignition is switched on
is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open
up and block your view. You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
G Risk of injury
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open,
switched off.
even if the engine is not running.
Some engine components can become very G Risk of injury
hot. The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage
To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those could be set in motion.
components described in the Owner's Manual When the bonnet is open, you or others could
and observe the relevant safety notes. be injured by the wiper linkage.
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
G Risk of injury switched off and that the key has been pulled
The radiator fan between the radiator and the out of the ignition lock before opening the
engine can start automatically, even if the key bonnet.
has been removed from the ignition lock. For
this reason, you must not reach into the fan
rotation area. You could otherwise be injured.
Engine compartment 205
X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. X Raise the bonnet slightly and remove sup-
The bonnet is released. port strut ? from recess =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press it
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
not folded away from the windscreen. Oth- into bracket A until it engages.
erwise, you could damage the windscreen X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a
wipers or the bonnet. height of approximately 20 cm.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-
erly.
If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.

Engine oil
Notes on the oil level
Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
X Pull handle ; of the bonnet catch out- sumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1000 km.
wards from the radiator grille as far as it will The oil consumption may be higher than this
go and lift the bonnet up. when the vehicle is new or if you frequently
drive at high engine speeds.
! Do not lift the bonnet by bonnet catch
handle ;. The handle may otherwise be Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
damaged. stick
On vehicles with a diesel engine, the oil level
can be checked using the on-board computer.
The engine oil for petrol engines is checked
using a dipstick.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.
X Swing support strut ? upwards and insert
it into recess =.
Closing the bonnet

G Risk of injury
as you close the bonnet.
Example: vehicles with a petrol engine
Z
Example: vehicles with a turbo/diesel engine The measurement takes a few seconds. You
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick will see one of the following messages in the
tube. multifunction display:
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. REng. oil level OK
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : into the guide RAdd 1.0 litre to reach maximum oil
tube to the stop, and take it out again. level
The oil level is correct if the level is between RAdd 1.5 litres to reach maximum
MIN mark = and MAX mark ;. oil level
X Top up the oil if necessary. R Add 2.0 litres to reach maximum
oil level
Checking the oil level using the on- X Top up the oil if necessary.
board computer If the engine is at normal operating tempera-
On vehicles with a diesel engine, the oil level ture and the Engine oil level Reduce
can be checked using the on-board computer. oil level message appears, the engine oil
On petrol-engine models, the dipstick must level is too high.
be used to check the engine oil level. X Have excess oil siphoned off.
When checking the oil level:
! Do not add too much oil when topping up.
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Topping up with too much oil can result in
Rthe engine should be switched off for damage to the engine or the catalytic con-
approximately five minutes if the engine is verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
at normal operating temperature. If the Switch ignition on to check
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in engine oil level message appears:
the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
X Press the & or * button on the steer- lock.
ing wheel to select the following message:
If the Observe waiting time message
appears:
X If the engine is at normal operating tem-
perature: repeat the measurement after
about five minutes.
If the engine is not at normal operating
temperature (e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly): repeat the measurement
after about 30 minutes.
Engine compartment 207
If the Engine oil level not when i The difference between the minimum
engine on message appears: mark and the maximum mark on the oil
X Switch off the engine. dipstick is approximately 1.2 litres.
X If the engine is at normal operating tem- ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is
perature: wait about five minutes before above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too
carrying out the measurement. much oil has been added. This can lead to
If the engine is not at normal operating damage to the engine or the catalytic con-
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
started briefly: wait about 30 minutes Further information on engine oil
before carrying out the measurement. (Y page 252).
i If you wish to cancel the measurement, X Replace cap : on the filler neck and

press the * or & button on the steer- tighten clockwise.
ing wheel. Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
Adding engine oil
H Environmental note Checking and adding other service
When topping up the oil, take care not to spill products
any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is
harmful to the environment. Checking the coolant level
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
G Risk of fire and injury is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
If engine oil comes into contact with hot down.
engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn X Turn the key to position 2(Y page 107) in
yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot the ignition lock.
engine parts.
X Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
G Risk of injury
The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore,
only unscrew the cap once the engine has
cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge
must display less than 70 † . Otherwise, you
could be scalded if hot coolant escapes.
Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it.
X Top up with the amount of oil required.
Observe the specifications in the on-board
computer when doing so or fill carefully to the
maximum mark on the oil dipstick.
Z
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock- G Risk of fire

wise and allow excess pressure to escape. Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable.
X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibi-
remove it. ted when handling washer fluid concentrate.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the filler neck when cold, there is ! Only use washer fluid concentrate which
enough coolant in coolant expansion is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuit-
tank ;. able washer fluid concentrate could dam-
age the plastic lamp lenses of the head-
If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm
lamps.
above marker bar = in the filler neck when
warm, there is enough coolant in coolant ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in
expansion tank ;. the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the

X If necessary, top up with coolant that has level sensor may be damaged.
been tested and approved by Mercedes- i Add windscreen washer concentrate, e.g.
Benz. MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all year
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far round.
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 254).
Windscreen washer system and head-

lamp cleaning system
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
windscreen washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system.
i Vehicle components and their service
Example: washer fluid reservoir
products must match. Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you use products that have X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a con-
been tested and approved by Mercedes- tainer beforehand.
Benz. These are listed under the relevant X At temperatures above freezing: fill the
section in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water
Manual. and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g.
You can recognise service products MB SummerFit).
approved by Mercedes-Benz by the follow- X At temperatures below freezing: fill the
ing inscription on the containers: washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g.
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to the
outside temperatures.
Other designations or recommendations
that relate to a level of quality or a specifi- X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
cation in accordance with an MB Sheet X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.
number (such as MB 229.5) have not nec- X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
essarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
until it engages.
You can obtain further information from
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Maintenance 209
Maintenance Hiding a service message

ASSYST PLUS service interval display X Press the reset button on the left of the
instrument cluster (Y page 22).
Service messages
Information on the type of service and service Displaying service messages
intervals (see separate Service Booklet). X Switch on the ignition.
You can obtain further information from a
X Press V or U to select the standard
display menu on the steering wheel
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
(Y page 152).
informs you when the next service is due.
X Press & or * to select the ASSYST

If a service due date has been exceeded, you
also hear an acoustic signal. PLUS service interval display.
The service due date appears in the multi-
The multifunction display shows a service function display.
message for a few seconds, e.g.
Service A due in .. km
Please bear the following in mind
Service A due now
Service A overdue by .. km Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-
The letter indicates how much time the work- val display
shop will require to carry out the service work. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
The letters displayed range from A for a short Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the
service duration to H for a long service dura- ASSYST PLUS service interval display after
tion. the service work has been carried out.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display You can obtain further information, e.g.
does not take into account any periods of regarding service work, from a Mercedes-
time during which the battery is disconnec- Benz Service Centre or directly from
ted. Mercedes-Benz.
Maintaining the time-dependent service ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval indi-
schedule: cator has been inadvertently reset, this set-
X Note down the service due date displayed ting can be corrected at a Mercedes-Benz
in the multifunction display before discon- Service Centre.
necting the battery. Have the service work carried out as descri-
or bed in the Service Booklet. There may oth-
erwise be increased wear, resulting in dam-
X Subtract the battery disconnection periods
age to the vehicle or to the major assem-
from the service date shown on the display
blies.
after reconnecting the battery.
Driving abroad
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the is also available in other countries. The
engine oil level (Y page 205). Service Hotline's current telephone numbers
for use when you are abroad are to be found
in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section
of the Service Booklet.
Z
210 Care
Care You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car

wash from the very start.
Notes on care If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
retaining the quality in the long term. X Remove the radio/telephone aerial.
Use care products and cleaning agents rec-
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! If you do not remove the radio/telephone
aerial, the automatic car wash may damage
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any it or the vehicle.
of the following:
! When washing your vehicle in a tow-
Rdry, rough or hard cloths through car wash, make sure that the
Rabrasive cleaning agents AUTOTRONIC is in position N; otherwise,

Rsolvents the vehicle could be damaged.
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
! Make sure that:
Do not scrub. Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are
Do not touch the surfaces or protective closed completely.
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or switched off (OFF button is depressed/
damage the surfaces and protective film. airflow control is turned to position 0).
H Environmental note Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at posi-
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning tion 0.

cloths in an environmentally responsible man- The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
ner. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windscreen and the wiper
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
screen.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
High-pressure cleaning equipment
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after clean- G Risk of accident
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
brake pads, thus drying them. The vehicle lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your
can then be parked up. vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could oth-
erwise damage the tyres and cause an acci-
dent.
Care of the exterior
Automatic car wash ! Always maintain a distance of at least
30 cm between the vehicle and the high-
G Risk of accident pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the correct distance is available from the
the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For equipment manufacturer.
this reason, following a car wash, drive with Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle
particular care until the brakes are dry. around when cleaning your vehicle.
Care 211
Do not aim directly at any of the following: with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
Rtyres lighter fluid.
Rdoor X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.
Relectrical X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
components
Rbattery ! Do not affix:
Rconnectors
Rstickers
Rlights
Rfilms
Rseals
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
Rtrim elements
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
Rventilation slots damage the paintwork.

Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures. Care and treatment of matt paintwork
If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, observe
Cleaning the wheels
the following instructions in order to avoid
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
to remove brake dust. This could damage care.
wheel bolts and brake components. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended with a clear matt finish.
period straight after cleaning it, particularly ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause shiny.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after clean- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and wax. These products are only suitable for
brake pads, thus drying them. The vehicle high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
can then be parked up. with matt finish leads to considerable sur-
face damage (shiny, spotted areas).
Cleaning the paintwork Always have paintwork repairs performed
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
quate care cannot always be completely ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- treatment under any circumstances.
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
Service Centre. from the range of recommended and
X Remove impurities immediately, where approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover Cleaning the windows
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
G Risk of injury
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove
off the treated areas afterwards.
the key from the ignition lock before cleaning
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
the windscreen or the wiper blades. The wind-
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
Z
212 Care
screen wipers could otherwise move and X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
injure you. screen.
X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a
! Only fold the windscreen wipers away damp cloth.
from the windscreen when vertical. Other- X Fold the windscreen wipers back again
wise, you will damage the bonnet. before switching on the ignition.
X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
agent that is recommended and approved back. The windscreen could be damaged if
by Mercedes-Benz. the wiper arm hits against it suddenly.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, Cleaning the exterior lighting
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
vents to clean the inside of the windows.
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
Do not use hard objects to clean the insides
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
of the windows, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
windows. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
! Clean the water drainage channels of the cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
windscreen and the rear window at regular Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
and pollen may under certain circumstan- lenses of the exterior lighting.
ces prevent water from draining away. This
can lead to corrosion damage and damage Cleaning the sensors
to electronic components.
Cleaning the wiper blades

G Risk of injury
Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove
the key from the ignition lock before cleaning
the windscreen or the wiper blades. The wind-
screen wipers could otherwise move and
injure you.
! Only fold the windscreen wipers away

from the windscreen when vertical. Other-
wise, you will damage the bonnet.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
graphite coating could be damaged. This ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres-
could cause wiper noise. sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a
distance of at least 30 cm between the
vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz-
Care 213
zle. Information about the correct distance X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease posi-
is available from the equipment manufac- tions : to A and the ball coupling recess
turer. of the vehicle.
X Treat the lock with an oil that is acid and
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes resin-free.
Impurities combined with the effects of road X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
grit and corrosive environmental factors may working properly.
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
! Observe the note on care provided by the
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
trailer manufacturer.
tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing. i Maintenance of the ball coupling and

! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with trailer tow hitch can also be performed at
a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as
wheel cleaner.
X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome H Environmental note
care product tested and approved by Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-
Mercedes-Benz. ronmentally-responsible manner.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

Interior care
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it
becomes dirty or corroded. Cleaning the display
X Remove any rust using a wire brush. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or it is switched off and has cooled down.
a brush. X Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially-available microfibre cloth and TFT/
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-
LCD display cleaner.
pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
fibre cloth.
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
lowing:
Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household clean-
ing agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
: Guide pin when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-
; Locking balls ble damage to the display.
= Guide faces
? Release lever
A Ball neck head
Z
214 Care
Cleaning the plastic trim Cleaning the seat covers

G Risk of injury ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen-
When cleaning the steering wheel boss and uine leather, artificial leather or
dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning damage the cover.
agents containing solvents cause the surface ! Observe the following when cleaning:
to become porous, and as a result plastic
Rclean genuine leather covers carefully
parts may break away and be thrown around
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
the interior when an airbag is deployed, which
ers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that
may result in severe injuries.
the leather does not become soaked. It
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- may otherwise become rough and
ces: cracked. Only use leather care agents
that have been tested and approved by
Rstickers
Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these
Rfilms from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
Rscented oil bottles or similar items a Mercedes-Benz Service centre.
You could otherwise damage the plastic. Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
or sunscreen to come in contact with the
Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces. moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
products recommended and approved by results depend on the type of dirt and
Mercedes-Benz. how long it has been there.
The surface may change colour tempora- Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp
rily. Wait until the surface is dry again. cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat
sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning real wood and trim strips i Note that regular care is essential to
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim strips with ensure that the appearance and comfort of
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre the covers is retained over time.
cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning Cleaning the seat belts
products recommended and approved by X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
Mercedes-Benz. tion.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- cleaning agents. Do not dry the seatbelts
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of at temperatures above 80 † or by exposing
damaging the surface. them to direct sunlight.
215

Where will I find...? ........................... 216
Flat tyre ............................................. 218
Battery ............................................... 227
Jump-starting .................................... 231
Towing and tow-starting .................. 232
Electrical fuses ................................. 236
Breakdown assistance
216 Where will I find...?
Vehicle equipment Setting up the warning triangle
i This Owner's Manual describes all models

functions.
X Fold feet = down and out to the side.

Where will I find...?
X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a

Warning triangle triangle and lock them at the top using
upper press-stud :.
Removing the warning triangle
The warning triangle, first-aid kit and TIREFIT
kit are in the left-hand stowage compartment First-aid kit
in the luggage compartment.
X Open the stowage compartment.
X To open the stowage compartment: turn

rotary knob : anti-clockwise and fold
: First-aid kit (TIREFIT kit behind it)
down cover ;.
; Warning triangle
X Remove warning triangle ;.
Where will I find...? 217
X Remove first-aid kit =. left-hand stowage compartment in the lug-

gage compartment (Y page 216).
i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit
at least once a year. Replace the contents
X Fold down the left-hand rear seat backrest
if necessary, and replace missing contents. (Y page 191).
X Push the cover up and fold it to the side.
Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is located underneath
the front of the driver's seat.
: Jack
; Vehicle tool kit
= Folding wheel chock
The vehicle tool kit contains:
X Pull tab : upwards. RRatchet ring spanner
X Remove fire extinguisher ;.
ROne pair of gloves
i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after RWheel wrench
each use and checked every one or two RTowing eye

years. It may otherwise fail in an emer-
gency.
Observe the legal requirements in all coun- Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency
tries concerned. spare wheel
The spare wheel or "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel is located under the luggage
Vehicle tool kit compartment floor.
The vehicle tool kit, the folding wheel chock X Lift the luggage compartment floor up
and the jack are in the left-hand stowage (Y page 197).
compartment behind the rear seat backrest.
i Vehicles are not equipped with the tools
needed to change a wheel when they leave
the factory, e.g. jack or wheel wrench.
Country-specific differences are possible.
To obtain tools approved for your vehicle,
visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
i On vehicles without a vehicle tool kit, the
towing eye is next to the first-aid kit in the
218 Flat tyre
X Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: a TIREFIT kit from a Mercedes-Benz Service
remove ball coupling stowage well ; and Centre, for example.
ball coupling :. X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first or reverse gear.
X Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: move the
selector lever to P.
X Turn retaining screw = anti-clockwise. X Switch off the engine.

i Vehicles with a subwoofer in the emer- X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
gency spare wheel: observe the instruc- X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
tions on the subwoofer when removing the
Make sure that they are not endangered as
subwoofer.
they do so.
X Remove the spare wheel or "Minispare" X Make sure that no one is near the danger
emergency spare wheel ?. area whilst a wheel is being changed. Any-
For further information on changing a wheel one who is not directly assisting in the
and fitting the spare wheel, see wheel change should, for example, stand
(Y page 222). behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
fic conditions when doing so.
Flat tyre X Close the driver's door.
Preparing the vehicle X Place the warning triangle (Y page 216) a

suitable distance away. Observe legal
Your vehicle may be equipped with: requirements.
Ra TIREFIT kit
Ran emergency spare wheel
Ra spare wheel TIREFIT kit
RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char-
Using the TIREFIT kit
acteristics) (Y page 226)
You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small
i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread.
vehicles with MOExtended tyres. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not down to -20 †.
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit
if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tyres. You can obtain
Flat tyre 219
G Risk of accident RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your

In the following situations, your safety is at eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly
particular risk as tyre sealant is unable to pro- with clean water.
vide sufficient breakdown assistance: RChange out of clothing which has come into
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre contact with TIREFIT immediately.
greater than 4 mm. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doc-
Rthe wheel rim is damaged. tor immediately.

Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures Keep TIREFIT away from children.
or on a flat tyre. RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty
specialist workshop which has the necessary of water.
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor
the work required. immediately.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes.

pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can
on safety-related systems must be carried out then be removed like a layer of film.
at a qualified specialist workshop. If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro-
X Do not remove any foreign objects which ethylene.
have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or Your vehicle is provided with one of two dif-
nails. ferent tyre inflation compressors:
X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom-
RVersion 1: the hose with the pressure
panying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the
tyre inflation compressor from the tray in gauge and the cable are behind a flap.
RVersion 2: the pressure gauge is in the tyre
the stowage compartment (Y page 217).
inflation compressor.
TIREFIT kit version 1
X Affix part : of the sticker within the driv-

er's field of vision.
X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve
X Open flap ;.
on the wheel with the defective tyre.
X Pull connector A with the cable and hose
G Risk of injury B out of the housing.
TIREFIT must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing.
Z
220 Flat tyre
X Screw hose B onto flange C of tyre seal- Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-
ant bottle :. pressor during this phase.
X Place tyre sealant bottle : head down- X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run
wards into recess = of the tyre inflation for five minutes. The tyre should then have
compressor. attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
pressor for longer than six minutes at a
time without a break. It may otherwise
overheat.
The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-
ated again once it has cooled down.
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been achieved after five minutes, see

(Y page 221).
X Remove the cap from valve E on the faulty If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been achieved after five minutes, see
tyre.
(Y page 221).
X Make sure pressure release screw F on

pressure gauge G is fully closed.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve E. X Pull connector ? with the cable and hose
A out of the housing.
X Insert plug A into the cigarette lighter
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre seal-
socket (Y page 200) or into a 12 V socket
in your vehicle (Y page 200). ant bottle :.
X Turn the key to position 1(Y page 107) in X Place tyre sealant bottle : head down-
the ignition lock. wards into recess ; of the tyre inflation
XPress on/off switch ? on the tyre inflation compressor.
compressor to I.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched
on. The tyre is inflated.
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Flat tyre 221
Tyre pressure of at least 180 kPa

(1.8 bar/26 psi) not reached
If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved:
X Press the on/off switch on the tyre inflation
compressor to 0.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched
off.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty approximately 10 m.
tyre. X Pump up the tyre again.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
G Risk of accident
X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter
If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa
socket (Y page 200) or into a 12 V socket (1.8 bar/26 psi) cannot be achieved, the tyre
in your vehicle (Y page 200). is too severely damaged.
X Turn the key to position 1(Y page 107) in
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
the ignition lock. specialist workshop which has the necessary
X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
compressor to I. the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
The tyre inflation compressor is switched mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
on. The tyre is inflated. Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
pressure can briefly rise to approximately tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). cialist workshop.
Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-
pressor during this phase. Tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run 26 psi) is reached
for five minutes. The tyre should then have X Press the on/off switch on the tyre inflation
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa compressor to 0.
(1.8 bar/26 psi). The tyre inflation compressor is switched
off.
! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
X Remove the tyre sealant bottle from the
pressor for longer than six minutes at a
time without a break. It may otherwise wheel.
overheat. ! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of
The tyre inflation compressor can be oper- the filler hose. This may cause stains.
ated again once it has cooled down. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
been achieved after five minutes, see X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
(Y page 221). tion compressor and the warning triangle.
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has X Pull away immediately.
not been achieved after five minutes, see
(Y page 221).
Z
222 Flat tyre
G Risk of accident
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
80 km/h.
The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in
the driver's field of vision.
The vehicle's handling characteristics may be
affected.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten

minutes and check the tyre pressure with
the tyre inflation compressor. TIREFIT kit version 2
G Risk of accident X To reduce the tyre pressure (version

If the tyre pressure is less than 130 kPa 2): depress pressure release button E
(1.3 bar/20 psi), the tyre is too severely dam- next to pressure gauge F.
aged. Do not drive any further. Consult a X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
qualified specialist workshop which has the tion compressor and the warning triangle.
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz
tyre changed there.
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related soon as possible at a qualified specialist
systems must be carried out at a qualified workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service
specialist workshop. Centre.
H Environmental note
X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi) (for the values, Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of
see the fuel filler flap). professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
the tyre inflation compressor. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Changing a wheel and fitting the spare

wheel
Preparing the vehicle
G Risk of accident
The wheel and tyre size of the emergency
spare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that of
X To reduce the tyre pressure (version the damaged wheel. When using an emer-
1): open pressure release screw F on gency spare wheel/spare wheel the handling
pressure gauge G. characteristics of the vehicle may change.
Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
Flat tyre 223
Never operate the vehicle with more than one Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel that dif- rolling away
fers in size. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
Only use an emergency spare wheel/spare it can be found in the vehicle tool kit
wheel of a differing size briefly. (Y page 217).
When using an emergency spare wheel you The folding wheel chock is an additional
must not exceed the maximum speed of securing measure to prevent the vehicle from
80 km/h. rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
G Risk of accident
Have the emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel replaced with a new wheel as soon as
possible at a qualified specialist workshop
which has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools to carry out the work required.
on safety-related systems must be carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Fold both plates upwards :.
i Vehicles without an emergency spare
X Fold out lower plate ;.
wheel/spare wheel are not equipped with
a tyre-change tool kit at the factory. For X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
more information on which tools are the openings in base plate =.
required to perform a wheel change on your
X On level ground: place chocks or other
vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, centring pin or
suitable items under the front and rear of
wheel wrench, consult a Mercedes-Benz
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
Service Centre.
wheel you wish to change.
X Prepare the vehicle as described
(Y page 218).
X On downhill gradients: place chocks or
other suitable items in front of the wheels
X Take the "Minispare" emergency spare
of the front and rear axle.
wheel or the spare wheel out of the stow-
age well under the luggage compartment
floor. Raising the vehicle
X Remove the following items from the left-
G Risk of injury
hand stowage compartment behind the The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle
rear seat backrest: briefly for wheel changes.
Rthe vehicle tool kit
The vehicle must be placed on stands if you
Rthe folding wheel chock
intend to work under it.
Rthe jack
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm,
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden
away. blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay.
The vehicle could otherwise slip off the jack
and seriously injure you.
Z
224 Flat tyre
Do not start the engine at any time while the

wheel is being changed.
Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being
supported by the jack. If you do not raise the
vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack
(e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the
tailgate is opened or closed) and seriously
injure you.
G Risk of accident
If you fail to position the jack correctly, the Vehicles with chrome wheels
vehicle may:
X Vehicles with chrome wheels: take
Rslip off the jack removal tool : out of the vehicle docu-
Rinjure you or others ment wallet.

Rbe damaged. X Guide removal tool : through the hole in
Therefore, make sure that the jack is posi- wheel trim ;.
tioned correctly in the respective jacking X Remove wheel trim ; using removal
points. Before positioning the jack, remove tool :.
any dirt that may have collected in the jacking
points. Please note that you must position the
jack in the opening of the jacking point.
X Using wheel wrench =, loosen the bolts on

the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
Steel wheel with wheel trim
pletely.
X Vehicles with steel wheels: carefully
The jacking points for the jack are located
reach into two of the wheel trim openings
behind the wheel housings of the front wheels
and remove the wheel trim.
and in front of the wheel housings of the rear
wheels.
X Take the socket wrench and ratchet ring
spanner out of the vehicle tool kit.
X Insert the socket wrench into the ratchet
ring spanner and place it on the jack so that
the letters AUF are visible.
Flat tyre 225
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This could

cause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub.
G Risk of accident
If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must
not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or Service 24h for this pur-
X Position jack A at jacking point ?. pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
G Risk of accident
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel. Other wheel bolts could
work loose or damage the brake system.
X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi- Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely
tioned directly under the jacking point. while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle
X Turn ratchet ring spanner B until jack A could topple off the jack.
sits completely on jacking point ? and the X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. surfaces.
X Turn ratchet ring spanner B until the tyre
is raised a maximum of three centimetres
from the ground.
Removing a wheel
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel
hubs could otherwise be damaged when
the bolts are tightened.
X Remove the wheel. X Slide the emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel onto the wheel hub and push it on.
Fitting a new wheel X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
ger-tight.
G Risk of accident
Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts.
Z
226 Flat tyre
Lowering the vehicle MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat

X Insert the socket wrench into the ratchet characteristics)
ring spanner and place it on the jack so that MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat
the letters AB are visible. characteristics) enable your vehicle to con-
X Turn the ratchet ring spanner until the vehi- tinue its journey even with a complete loss of
cle is once again standing firmly on the tyre pressure in one or more tyres.
ground. MOExtended tyres may only be used in con-
X Place the jack to one side. junction with the activated tyre pressure loss
warning system or with the activated tyre
pressure monitor.
The maximum permissible distance which
can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the
load in the vehicle. It is 80 km if the vehicle
is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden.

The maximum permissible distance which
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tyre pressure loss warning
appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- 80 km/h.
wise pattern in the sequence indicated
(: to A ). The tightening torque must be
G Risk of accident
130 Nm. The handling characteristics of your vehicle
deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example:
G Risk of accident Rwhen cornering
Have the tightening torque checked immedi- Rwhen braking
ately after a wheel is changed. The wheels Rwhen accelerating rapidly
could work loose if they are not tightened to
a torque of 130 Nm. Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid
sudden changes in direction and sudden
X Turn the jack back to its initial position and acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles
store it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road.
in the stowage compartment behind the This is particularly the case when the vehicle
rear seat backrest. is heavily laden.
The maximum permissible distance that can
i When you are driving with the emergency be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large
spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It
warning system cannot function reliably. can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy
Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning load, sudden changes in direction, the road
system when the defective wheel has been surface condition, outside temperature, etc.,
replaced with a new wheel. or further if you drive carefully and conserva-
tively.
Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if:
Ryou hear banging noises.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
Battery 227
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if
RESP® is intervening constantly.
you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for
a long period of time.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre.
After driving in run-flat mode, you must have G Risk of injury
the wheel(s) checked for damage at a quali- Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
fied specialist workshop which has the nec- tective measures when handling batteries.
essary specialist knowledge and tools to carry Risk of explosion
out the work required. The faulty tyre must be
replaced in every case.
Fire, naked flames and
smoking are prohibited
when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic.
i When replacing one or all tyres, make Avoid contact with the skin,
sure that you only use tyres marked eyes or clothing.
MOExtended and of the specified size for Wear suitable protective
the vehicle. clothing, in particular
gloves, an apron and a face
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not
mask.
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi- Immediately rinse acid
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit splashes off with clean
if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat water. Consult a doctor if
properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit necessary.
can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Wear eye protection.
Service Centre.
Keep children away.

Battery
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- Observe this Owner's Man-
mum possible service life, it must always be ual.
sufficiently charged.
Have the battery charge checked more fre-
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
Batteries contain pollutants.
lengthy period.
It is against the law to dis-
To prevent damage from corrosion, only pose of them with the house-
replace the battery with one that has a central hold rubbish. They must be
ventilation cover. collected separately and
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
228 Battery
recycled in an environmen- i Remove the key if you park the vehicle

tally responsible manner. and do not require any electrical consum-
Dispose of batteries in an ers. The vehicle will then use very little
environmentally responsible energy, thus conserving battery power.
manner. Take discharged Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not
batteries to a qualified spe- carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g.
cialist workshop, e.g. a removing or charging. Always have this work
Mercedes-Benz Service performed at a qualified specialist workshop,
Centre, or to a special col- e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
lection point for old batter-
ies.
Installation location of the battery
G Risk of injury Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- vehicle interior. It is located in the footwell in
mends that you only use batteries which have front of the front seat on the right-hand side
been tested and approved for your vehicle by of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide travel.
increased impact protection to prevent vehi- X Apply the parking brake and on vehicles
cle occupants from suffering acid burns
with AUTOTRONIC, shift the transmission
should the battery be damaged in the event
to position P.
of an accident.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
To prevent acid burns, observe the following
radio, blower, etc.).
safety notes when handling batteries:
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 107) in
Rdo not lean over the battery.
the ignition lock and remove it.
Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery.
Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit
and the battery's gas mixture could ignite.
Rmake sure that you do not create an elec-
trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic
clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics.
Therefore, you should not pull or slide the
battery over carpets or other synthetic
materials.
Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge
a possible electrostatic charge, step out of
the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. X Remove the floormat.
Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The
X Remove retaining screw : by turning it
battery may explode as a result of electro-
anti-clockwise, e.g. by using a coin.
static charge or due to flying sparks.
X Lift up cover ;.
! Switch off the engine and remove the key X Remove filter box :.
before disconnecting the terminal clamps
from the battery. Otherwise, you may i Information on disconnecting the battery
destroy electronic components, such as (Y page 229).
the alternator.
Battery 229
Disconnecting the battery Removing/fitting the battery

G Risk of accident X To remove: disconnect the battery
If the battery is disconnected: (Y page 229).
Rthe brake boosting effect will not be avail- X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in
able. Greater braking force will then be place.

required and brake pedal travel will be lon- X Remove the battery.
ger. If necessary, depress the brake pedal X To fit: follow the steps described in "To
with maximum force. remove" in reverse order.
Rthe transmission is locked in position P on
vehicles with AUTOTRONIC.
Charging the battery
! Always disconnect the battery in the
order described below. Never mix up the G Risk of injury
terminal clamp disconnection/connection Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated
order and never mix up the terminal area. As the battery is being charged, gases
clamps. You may otherwise damage the can escape and generate minor explosions.
vehicle electronics. This could injure you and other persons or
cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
rosion on the vehicle.
You can obtain information about battery
chargers which allow the battery to be
charged while still installed from a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
G Risk of injury
There is a risk of acid burns during the charg-
ing process due to the gases which escape
: Positive terminal from the battery. Do not lean over the battery
; Battery during the charging process.
= Negative terminal
G Risk of injury
X Remove the negative terminal clamp from
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the
the battery.
skin, eyes or clothing.
X Remove the cover from the positive termi-
nal clamp. ! Only charge the installed battery with a
X Remove the positive terminal clamp from battery charger which has been tested and
the battery. approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
X Remove the breather hose from the side of chargers allow the battery to be charged
the battery. while still installed.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
X Read the battery charger's operating
instructions before charging the battery.
Z
230 Battery
Reconnecting the battery

! Always connect the battery in the order
described below. Never swap the terminal
clamps. You may otherwise damage the
vehicle electronics.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
radio, blower, etc.).
X Connect the positive terminal clamp and
secure the cover.
X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
i If the power supply has been interrupted,

e.g. if the battery has been reconnected,
you must carry out the following tasks:

Rset the clock (Y page 156).
Rreset the function for automatically fold-
ing the exterior mirrors in/out by folding
the mirrors out once (Y page 75).
Jump-starting 231
Jump-starting
G Risk of injury
There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from
the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started.
G Risk of explosion
Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid cre-
ating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke.
Comply with safety precautions when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery" in
the index.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may dam-
age the catalytic converter32 and create a risk of fire.
Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine.
Make sure the jump leads are not damaged.
Make sure the jump leads are not touching any other metal objects when they are connected
to the battery.
If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle
or from a second battery using jump leads.
Observe the following points:
X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has
cooled down33 .
X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
X Only use jump leads which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
X Make sure that the jump leads cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley or
the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
i Jump leads and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example.
X Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
X Manual transmission: engage neutral.
X AUTOTRONIC: shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
32 Only vehicles with a petrol engine.

33 Only vehicles with a petrol engine.
Z
232 Towing and tow-starting
X Open the bonnet (Y page 204).

X Open the front-passenger door and remove the cover in the front-passenger footwell
(Y page 228).
Position number A identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Remove the cover from positive terminal :.
X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery A
using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery A to negative terminal ? of your vehicle
using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery A first.
X Start the engine.
X First, remove the jump lead from negative terminal ? and negative terminal =, then from
positive terminal : and positive terminal ;, each time disconnecting from the battery on
your own vehicle first.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Towing and tow-starting G Risk of accident

If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid
towing bar if:
Observe the legal requirements for the rele-
vant countries when towing and tow-starting.
Towing and tow-starting 233
Rthe engine is not running. The battery must be connected and charged.
Rthere is a brake system malfunction. Otherwise, you:
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to
or the vehicle's electrical system. position 2
The power steering and the brake force boos- Rcannot shift to position N on vehicles with
ter do not work when the engine is not run- AUTOTRONIC

ning. You will then need considerably more Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: release the
force to steer and to brake and the brake selector lever lock manually to move it out of
pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, position P(Y page 118).
depress the brake pedal with maximum force.
i Switch off the automatic locking feature
Before towing away, make sure that the steer- (Y page 60) You could otherwise be locked
ing can be moved and is not locked. out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its Deactivate tow-away protection
weight must not exceed the maximum per- (Y page 53) before the vehicle is towed.
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
It is better to have the vehicle transported

Fitting/removing the towing eye
than to have it towed.
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum Fitting the towing eye
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend
not be exceeded. to use the vehicle for towing, fit the ball cou-
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire pling (Y page 141) and connect the towbar to
vehicle must be lifted up and transported. it.
! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to X Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise take the towing eye from the vehicle tool
be damaged. kit (Y page 217) or from the left-hand stow-
age compartment next to the first-aid kit in
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, the luggage compartment (Y page 216).
as this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. G Risk of injury
! Pull away smoothly when towing away or The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could
tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be
is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. particularly careful when removing the rear
cover.
! Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC must not be
tow-started. The transmission may other- The mountings for the removable towing eyes
wise be damaged. are located in the bumpers. They are at the
When towing vehicles with automatic trans- front and at the rear, under the covers.
mission, the transmission must be in position
N.
The selector lever must be in position N when
towing vehicles with AUTOTRONIC.
Z
234 Towing and tow-starting
raised. Intervention by ESP® could other-

wise damage the brake system.
! On vehicles with AUTOTRONIC, the selec-
tor lever must be in position N. The trans-
mission may otherwise be damaged.
lock.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
shift to neutral.
or
X Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: shift AUTO-

TRONIC to position N.
X Release the parking brake.
X Deactivate automatic locking
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
(Y page 158).
direction of the arrow.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
X Take cover : off the opening. (Y page 81).
X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
stop and tighten it. 0 and leave the key in the ignition lock.
Removing the towing eye

Towing the vehicle with both axles on
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.
the ground
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press
It is important that you observe the safety
until it engages.
instructions when towing away your vehicle
X Depending on the vehicle equipment, place (Y page 232).
the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 217) or into the left-hand stowage G Risk of accident
compartment next to the first-aid kit in the The power steering and the brake force boos-
luggage compartment (Y page 216). ter do not work when the engine is not run-
ning. You will then need much more effort to
brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your style
Towing the vehicle with the front axle of driving accordingly.
raised
XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps
When towing your vehicle with the front axle (Y page 81).
raised, it is important that you observe the i When towing with the hazard warning
safety instructions (Y page 232). lamps switched on, use the combination
! The ignition must be switched off if you switch as usual to signal a change of direc-
are towing the vehicle with the front axle tion. In this case, only the turn signals for
the desired direction flash. When the com-
Towing and tow-starting 235
bination switch is reset, the hazard warning Tow-starting (emergency engine

lamps start flashing again. starting)
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition When tow-starting, it is important that you
lock. observe the safety instructions (Y page 232)
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the and the legal requirements in each respective
brake pedal and keep it depressed. country.
! Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC must not be
depress the clutch pedal. tow-started. Otherwise, you could damage
X Shift to neutral. AUTOTRONIC.
or Before tow-starting the following conditions
X Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: shift AUTO- must be fulfilled:
TRONIC to position N.
Rthe battery is connected.
Rthe engine has cooled down.
X Release the parking brake.
Rthe catalytic converters have cooled down.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
Transporting the vehicle (Y page 81).

X Fit the towing eye (Y page 233).
The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be
X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing
used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-
rope.
porter if you wish to transport it.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
shift to neutral.
lock.
X Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: turn the key
X Depress the clutch pedal and keep it
to position 2 in the ignition lock.
depressed.
X Move the selector lever to N.
X Shift to neutral.
As soon as the vehicle is loaded: X Release the brake pedal.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by X Tow-start the vehicle.
applying the parking brake. X Engage second engage gear.
X Release the clutch pedal slowly, do not
shift to first gear or reverse gear. operate the accelerator pedal while doing
X Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC: move the so.
selector lever to position P. The engine is started.
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position X Depress the clutch pedal and shift to neu-
0 and remove the key from the ignition tral.
lock. X Stop at a suitable place.
X Secure the vehicle. X Apply the parking brake.
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope.
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle X Remove the towing eye (Y page 234).
such as axle or steering components. Oth- X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
erwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
Z
236 Electrical fuses
Electrical fuses fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well
The fuse box is located in the front-passenger
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down footwell in front of the seat.
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
G Risk of fire
Only use fuses that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the systems con-
cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge
faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload
could cause a fire. Have the cause traced and

rectified at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Remove the footmats.
X Turn retaining screw ; anti-clockwise
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of using a coin for example.
the same rating, which you can recognise by
X Raise cover : and remove it.
the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings
are listed in the fuse allocation chart. A X Remove the cover mat from the battery.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy
to advise you.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
tems could be damaged. : Fuse allocation chart
; Fuse box
Before changing a fuse
X Park the vehicle and apply the parking
brake.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
The fuses and the fuse allocation chart are

located in the fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell.
237

Directives to be observed ................ 238
Maintenance and care of wheels
and tyres ............................................ 238
Tyre pressure .................................... 239
Direction of rotation ......................... 242
Interchanging the wheels ................ 242
Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 243
Tyres and wheels

238 Maintenance and care of wheels and tyres
Vehicle equipment Directives to be observed
i This Owner's Manual describes all models ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type
and all standard and optional equipment of and make.
your vehicle available at the time of publi- ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country- wheels.
specific differences are possible. Please RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod-
note that your vehicle may not be equipped erate speeds for the first 100 km as they
with all features described. This also only reach their full performance after this
applies to safety-relevant systems and distance.
functions. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteris-
G Risk of accident
tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-
Tyres, wheels or accessories which have not cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged.
been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your If you suspect that a tyre is defective,
vehicle or are not used as they should be, can reduce your speed immediately. Stop the
Tyres and wheels
impair driving safety. As a result, you could vehicle as soon as possible to check the
cause an accident. Before purchasing and wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre
using them, enquire about their suitability, damage could also be causing the unusual
legal stipulations and factory recommenda- handling characteristics. If you find no
tions at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres
examined at a specialist workshop, for
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor
example at a Mercedes-Benz Service
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
Centre.
previous damage cannot always be detec-
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb
safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
fit used tyres if you have no information over kerbs, speed humps or similar eleva-
about their previous usage. tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the
Modification work on the brake system and sidewalls, can get damaged.
wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of
spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva-
lidates the General Operating Permit for the Maintenance and care of wheels and
vehicle. tyres
i Further information about tyres and Checking wheels and tyres
wheels can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of
your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctu-
res, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation,
cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at
least every 14 days, as well as after driving
Tyre pressure 239
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged Storing tyres

wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure.
RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and
Store tyres that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
the condition of the tread across the whole
tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel.
width of the tyre (Y page 239). If neces-
sary, turn the front wheels to full lock in
order to inspect the inner side of the tyre
Cleaning tyres
surface.
RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect G Risk of accident
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your
pressure monitoring systems) other than vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could oth-
the standard valve cap or other valve caps erwise damage the tyres and cause an acci-
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi- dent.
cle.
RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres
including the emergency spare wheel or the Tyre pressure
spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,
and correct the pressure as necessary Recommended tyre pressure
Tyres and wheels

(Y page 239). You will find a table of tyre pressures for var-
ious operating conditions on the inside of
your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
Tyre tread The applicable value for the emergency spare
G Risk of accident wheel is stated on the spare wheel and in the
technical data section.
Bear in mind that:
For trailer towing, adjust the tyre pressure of
Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads the rear tyres to the maximum tyre pressure
when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. value stated on the table inside the fuel filler
Thus, you should replace tyres that have flap.
insufficient tread.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the
laden" are defined in the table for different
tread depth is 4 mm or less as they no lon- numbers of passengers and amounts of lug-
ger provide adequate grip. gage. The actual number of seats may vary –
Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. for more information please refer to the vehi-
Thus, you should regularly check the tread cle's registration documents.
depth and the condition of the tread across If no other data is stated, the tyre pressures
the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, specified on the fuel filler flap apply for all
turn the front wheels to full lock in order to tyres approved for this vehicle.
inspect the tyre tread more easily.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi-
cle and cause an accident due to the reduced
grip of the tyres on the road.
Z
240 Tyre pressure
the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior

to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-
essary.
To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure

gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the
tyre pressure.
G Risk of accident
Do not fit anything else to the tyre valve other
If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre than the standard valve cap. In particular, ret-
pressure information following is only valid rofitted tyre pressure monitors which are
for that tyre size. screwed on to the valve may overload it and
cause it to fail. Due to their design, the valve
is kept open continuously, which may lead to
air loss.
G Risk of accident
Tyres and wheels
Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly:

Rcheck the tyre for foreign bodies.
Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
Rmake sure that only a valve cap approved
by Mercedes-Benz is fitted on the tyre
Instead of the complete tyre size, the rim valve.
diameter alone, for example R16, may be lis-
Tyre pressures that are too low have a nega-
ted.
tive effect on vehicle safety, which could lead
you to cause an accident.
If possible, only correct tyre pressures when

the tyres are cold. Depending on the ambient
temperature, the speed you are driving at and
the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature
and thus the tyre pressure may change by
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar, 1.5 psi) per
10 †. Take this into account when checking
the pressure of warm tyres and only correct
it if it is too low for the current operating con-
Rim diameter : is part of the tyre size and ditions.
can be found on the tyre sidewall.
G Risk of accident
Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low
has a negative effect on the vehicle's driving
safety, which could lead you to cause an acci-
dent. Therefore, you should regularly check
Tyre pressure 241
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn
too low can: you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
Rshorten the service life of the tyres tyre is penetrated by a foreign object.
Rcause increased tyre damage In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring
Rhave a negative effect on handling charac- the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do
teristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. by not make any sudden steering movements
causing aquaplaning) when doing so.
i The tyre pressure values given for low The function of the tyre pressure loss warning
loads are minimum values which offer you system is limited or delayed if:
good ride comfort characteristics. Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's
However, you can also use the values given tyres.
for higher loads. These are permissible and Rroad conditions are wintry.
will not adversely affect the running of the Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
vehicle.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-
H Environmental note nering at high speeds or driving with high
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least rates of acceleration).
every 14 days. Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
Tyres and wheels

Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof).
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Important safety notes Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-
ing system
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres-
sure loss warning system monitors the set Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
tyre pressure using the rotational speed of if you have:
the wheels. This enables the system to detect Rchanged the tyre pressure
significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed Rchanged the wheels or tyres
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of Rfitted new wheels or tyres
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre
message will appear in the multifunction dis-
play. pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap
to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four
G Risk of accident tyres is set correctly for the respective
The tyre pressure loss warning system does operating conditions.
not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pres- X Observe the notes in the section on tyre
sure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler pressures (Y page 239).
flap will help you decide whether the tyre
pressures should be corrected. G Risk of accident
The tyre pressure loss warning system does The tyre pressure loss warning system can
not replace the need to regularly check your only give reliable warnings if you have set the
vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of correct tyre pressure.
pressure on several tyres at the same time If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these
cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss incorrect values will be monitored.
warning system.
Z
242 Interchanging the wheels
A tyre with insufficient pressure results in You may fit an emergency spare wheel/spare
vehicle instability when driving, thus increas- wheel against the direction of rotation.
ing the risk of an accident. Observe the time restriction on use as well as
the speed limitation specified on the emer-
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 gency spare wheel/spare wheel.
(Y page 107) in the ignition lock.
X Press and hold the V or U button on
the multifunction steering wheel until the Interchanging the wheels
standard display appears in the multifunc-
tion display (Y page 152). G Risk of accident
X Press the * or & button until the Interchange the front and rear wheels only if
Run Flat Indicator Menu: press R- they have the same dimensions: for example
button message appears in the multifunc- size, offset, etc.
tion display. After every wheel interchange/change, have
X Press the reset button on the instrument the tightening torque checked at a qualified
cluster. specialist workshop that has the necessary
The Restart Run Flat Indicat.? mes- specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
sage appears in the multifunction display. the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Tyres and wheels
If you wish to confirm the restart: Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
X Press the W button. relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
The Run Flat Indicator restarted tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
message appears in the multifunction dis- cialist workshop.
play. The wheels could work loose if they are not
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure tightened to a torque of 130 Nm.
loss warning system will monitor the set For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
tyre pressures of all four tyres. mends that you only use wheel bolts of the
If you wish to cancel the restart: correct size which have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
X Press the X button.
or The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres
X Wait until the Restart Run Flat Indi‐ differ, depending on the operating conditions.
cat.? message goes out. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear
The tyre pressure values stored at the last pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres
restart will continue to be monitored. typically wear more on the shoulders and the
rear tyres in the centre.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
Direction of rotation rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels
every 5000 km to 10,000 km depending on
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation the degree of tyre wear. Do not reverse the
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk direction of tyre rotation.
of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben- Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
efits if the correct direction of rotation is the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
observed. is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and,
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss
its correct direction of rotation. warning system or the tyre pressure monitor.
Wheel and tyre combinations 243
! If your vehicle is equipped with the tyre Further information about tyres, wheels
pressure monitor, there are electronic and approved combinations can be
components in the wheels. obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Fitting tools must not be used in the area Centre.
of the valve. Otherwise, the electronic com- ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor
ponents could be damaged. recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
Always have the tyres replaced at a quali- previous damage cannot always be detec-
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,
Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle
safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not
fit used tyres if you have no information
Wheel and tyre combinations about their previous usage.
Please bear the following in mind i You will find a table of tyre pressures on
the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
For further information on tyre pressure,
ommends that you only use tyres and
see (Y page 239).
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi- i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
cle. fit the vehicle:
Tyres and wheels

These tyres have been specially adapted Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle
for use with the control systems, such as (left/right)
ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: Rwith the same type of tyres at a given
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original time (summer tyres, MOExtended tyres,
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended winter tyres)
(tyres with run-flat characteristics) i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
tain AMG tyres) It is therefore recommended that you addi-
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit
may only be used on wheels that have been if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. properties, e.g. winter tyres. You can obtain
Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tes- a TIREFIT kit from a Mercedes-Benz Service
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer- Centre, for example.
tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
tion, when driving with a load, tyre dimen-
sion variations could cause the tyres to
come into contact with the bodywork and
axle components. This could result in dam-
age to the tyres or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage resulting from the use of tyres,
wheels or accessories other than those tes-
ted and approved.
Z
244 Wheel and tyre combinations
Tyres
Both axles
B 160 / B 16034
B 180 / B 18034
R15 Summer tyres 195/65 R15 91 T
Winter tyres 195/65 R15 91 T M+Si
Wheels 6 J x 15 H2 ET 44
R16 Summer tyres 205/55 R16 91 H
Winter tyres 205/55 R16 91 H M+S i
R17 Summer tyres35 215/45 R17 87 V
Tyres and wheels
Both axles
B 180 CDI B 200 Turbo
B 200 / B 200 CDI
R16 Summer tyres 205/55 R16 91 H 205/55 R16 91 V
Winter tyres 205/55 R16 91 H M+S i 205/55 R16 91 H M+S i
Wheels 6 J x 16 H2 ET 46 6 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17 Summer tyres35 215/45 R17 87 V 215/45 R17 87 V
Wheels 7 J x 17 H2 ET 49 7 J x 17 H2 ET 49
MOExtended tyres
Both axles
All models
R16 Winter tyres36, 37 195/55 R16 87 H M+SiMOExtended
Light-alloy wheels 6 J x 16 H2 ET 46
34 BlueEFFICIENCY
35 Use of snow chains only permitted as a pull-away aid.
36 Tyreswith run-flat characteristics and only in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning
system.
37 Not on steel wheels.
Wheel and tyre combinations 245
Both axles
All models
R17 Summer 215/45 R17 87 V MOExtended
tyres36, 37, 38
AMG equipment
Both axles
All models
R18 Summer tyres39 215/40 R 18 89 W XL
Tyres and wheels

Spare wheel
Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted, your vehicle may be equipped
with the TIREFIT kit, a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel or a spare wheel.
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) are not equipped with
a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel40

All models
R16 Tyres T 125/90 R16 98 M
Tyre pressure 420 kPa (4.2 bar, 61 psi)
Wheels 3.5 B x 16 H2 ET 32
36 Tyreswith run-flat characteristics and only in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning
system.
37 Not on steel wheels.
38 Snow chains only permitted as a pull-away aid.
39 Use of snow chains only permitted as a pull-away aid.
40 Use of snow chains not permitted.
Z
246
247

Notes on the technical data ............. 248
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 248
Vehicle electronics ........................... 249
Vehicle identification plates ............ 250
Service products and capacities ..... 251
Vehicle data ...................................... 255
Tailgate opening dimensions ........... 259
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 259
Technical data
248 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Vehicle equipment Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type

from that for which the vehicle's general
i This Owner's Manual describes all models operating permit was granted.
and all standard and optional equipment of Rother road users could be endangered.
your vehicle available at the time of publi- Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely
cation of the Owner's Manual. Country- affected.
note that your vehicle may not be equipped G Risk of accident
with all features described. This also Driving safety may be impaired if non-
applies to safety-relevant systems and approved parts, tyres and wheels or safety-
functions. relevant accessories are used.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. This
Notes on the technical data could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
i The technical data was determined in For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends
accordance with EC Directives. All data that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or
applies to the vehicle's standard equip- parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels
ment. Therefore, the data may differ for and accessories that have been specifically
vehicles with optional equipment. You can approved for your vehicle.
obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well
You can find technical data on the Internet at: as control units and sensors for these
Technical data
http://www.mercedes-benz.com restraint systems may be installed in the

following areas of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Rdoor pillars
Rdoor sills
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con-
Rseats
version parts and accessories which have
Rdashboard
been specifically approved for your vehicle for
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite Rinstrument cluster
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is Rcentre console
unable to evaluate other parts. Mercedes- Do not install accessories such as audio
Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for systems in these areas. Do not carry out
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi- repairs or welding. You could impair the
cles, even if they have been independently or operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
officially approved. tems.
In Germany and some other countries, certain Have aftermarket accessories installed at
parts are only officially approved for installa- a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
tion or modification if they comply with legal Benz recommends that you use a
requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
parts meet this requirement. The use of non- pose.
approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit. This is the case if: H Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Vehicle electronics 249
quality as new parts. For these, the same war- tions intended for use with the basic wiring.
ranty applies as for new parts. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's addi-
tional instructions when installing the fittings.
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
! Have aftermarket radio frequency trans-
ber (VIN) (Y page 250) and the engine num-
mitting equipment installed at a qualified
ber (Y page 251) when ordering genuine
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec-
Mercedes-Benz parts.
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose.
Vehicle electronics The transmission output at the aerial base
must not exceed the maximum values below.
Tampering with the engine electron-
ics Waveband Maximum trans-
mission output
G Risk of accident (PEAK)
Only have work on the engine electronics and
related components carried out at a qualified
Short wave (f < 100 W
specialist workshop which has the necessary
54 MHz)
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out 4 m waveband 30 W
the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service 2 m waveband 50 W
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- 70 cm waveband 35 W
Technical data
cialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle's
GSM 900/AMPS 10 W
roadworthiness could be affected.
GSM 1800 10 W
! Only have maintenance work on the
engine electronics and its associated parts, UMTS 10 W
such as control units, sensors and connec-
tor leads, carried out at a qualified special- The following aerial positions may be used if
ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service RF transmitters have been properly installed:
Centre. Vehicle components may other-
wise wear more quickly and the vehicle's
operating permit may be invalidated.
Retrofitting of two-way radios and

mobile phones (RF transmitters)
Use the Technical Specification
ISO/TS 2160941 implementation regulation
when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) trans-
mitters.
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio
equipment (e.g. taxis, hire cars or official vehi-
cles), use the power supply or aerial connec-
41 ISO/TS 21609 – Technical Specification for Road Vehicles (EMC) guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment.
Z
250 Vehicle identification plates
band, GSM 900/AMPS, GSM 1800 and

UMTS.
Legal provisions for fittings must be
observed.
RF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of 100 mW (PEAK) may be used
in the vehicle without restrictions.
! The operating permit may be invalidated
if the instructions for installation and use of
RF transmitters are not observed, e.g.
Aerial positions approved wavebands, maximum output
: Front roof area and aerial positions on the vehicle.
; Rear roof area
= Rear wing42
Vehicle identification plates
G Risk of accident
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can
cle identification number (VIN) and
cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction.
paint code number
The vehicle's operating safety and thus your
own safety are impaired.
Have aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment installed at a qualified spe-
Technical data
cialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-

Centre for this purpose.
G Risk of injury
Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can
lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in
the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial
X Open the front right-hand door.
takes into account current scientific discus-
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
sions relating to the possible health hazards
that may result from electromagnetic fields.
Have aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment installed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
Centre for this purpose.
Deviations with respect to aerial locations,

output and frequencies must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
There is no restriction for aerial positions in
the outer area of the vehicle for these wave-
bands: trunked radio/Tetra, 70 cm wave-
42 Recommended installation position: on the side which faces the centre of the road.
Service products and capacities 251
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the crank-
case. More information can be obtained from
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Service products and capacities

Service products include the following:
Vehicle identification plate (example) Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel)
: Vehicle identification plate Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
; Vehicle manufacturer Rcoolant
= EU type approval number Rbrake fluid
? Vehicle identification number (VIN) Rwindscreen washer fluid
A Maximum permissible gross vehicle Vehicle components and their respective
weight lubricants must match. Mercedes-Benz rec-
B Maximum permissible mass of vehicle/ ommends that you use products that have
trailer combination been tested and specially approved by
C Maximum permissible front axle load Mercedes-Benz. These products are listed in
D Maximum permissible rear axle load this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the
Technical data
E Paint code relevant section.
You can recognise service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
Vehicle identification number (VIN) tion on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
In addition to being stamped on the vehicle
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
identification plate, the vehicle identification
number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle Other designations or recommendations that
body. It is located on the bulkhead in the relate to a level of quality or a specification in
engine compartment. accordance with an MB Sheet number (such
as MB 229.5) have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
You can obtain further information from any
G Risk of injury
When handling, storing and disposing of any
service products, please observe the relevant
regulations, as you could otherwise endanger
yourself and others.
Keep service products away from children.
X Open the bonnet (Y page 204). To protect your health, do not allow service
You will see vehicle identification number products to come into contact with your eyes
(VIN) :. or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if
any service product is swallowed.
Z
252 Service products and capacities
H Environmental note i Only for certain countries: the respective

Dispose of service products in an environ- current consumption and emission values
mentally-responsible manner. of your vehicle can be found in the COC
papers (EC CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM-
ITY). These documents are supplied when
the vehicle is delivered.
Fuel
The consumption figures for vehicles up to
Important safety notes the EURO 4 standard have been deter-
mined in accordance with EU Directive
G Risk of explosion 80/1268/EEC while figures for vehicles
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames complying with the EURO 5 standard or
and smoking are therefore prohibited when higher have been determined in accord-
handling fuels. ance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007,
Switch off the engine before refuelling. in each case based on the currently appli-
cable version. Deviations from these values
G Risk of injury may occur under normal operating condi-
Do not come into contact with fuels. tions.
It is hazardous to your health if your skin ! Do not use any fuel additives, as they can
comes into direct contact with fuels or you cause malfunctions and engine damage.
breathe in fuel vapours.
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-
Tank capacity
tists believe to be principally responsible for
Technical data
Total capacity 54 l global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your

vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to
Of which reserve fuel Approx- fuel consumption and therefore depend on:
imately 6 l Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
Rdriving style
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
ronmental influences or road conditions
vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small
amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-
to the fuel system and the engine. sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
iced regularly.
Further information on refuelling and on fuels
(Y page 119).
Notes on fuel consumption Engine oil
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in Please bear the following in mind
the following situations: The quality of engine oils is decisive for the
Rat very low temperatures function and service life of an engine. After
Rin urban traffic extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves
Ron short trips
engine oils which correspond to the current
technical standard.
Rwhen towing a trailer
Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved
Rin mountainous terrain
engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz
engines.
Service products and capacities 253
Further information on tested and approved i If the engine oils listed in the table are not
engine oils can be obtained from any available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 l
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes- of the following engine oils, once only, until
Benz recommends that you have the oil the next oil change:
change carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB
Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz approval is Approval 229.1 or ACEA A3
indicated on the oil container by the inscrip-
Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB
tion "MB Approval" and the corresponding
designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. Approval 229.1 or ACEA C3
The table shows which engines oil have been
Capacities
approved for your vehicle.
The following values refer to an oil change
Petrol engines MB Approval
including the oil filter.
B 160 229.3, 229.31, Vehicle model Replacement
B 16043 229.5, 229.51 amount with oil fil-
B 180 ter
B 18043 B 160 5.0 l
B 200 B 16045
B 200 TURBO B 180
B 18045
Diesel engines MB Approval B 200
Technical data
Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- B 200 TURBO
ter44 B 180 CDI 5.4 l
B 180 CDI 228.3, 228.5, B 200 CDI
B 200 CDI 228.51, 229.3,
229.31, 229.5, Additives
229.51
! Do not use additives in engine oil. This
Vehicles with a diesel particle filter could damage the engine.
B 180 CDI 228.51,
229.31, 229.51 Engine oil viscosity
B 200 CDI
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
You can call up an overview of approved of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
engine oils on the Internet at this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter- means that it is thin.
ing the designation, e.g. 229.5. Engine oil selection is based on the respective
outside temperatures and in accordance with
the SAE classification (viscosity). The table
below shows you which SAE classifications
are to be used. The low-temperature proper-
ties of engine oils can be significantly
43 BlueEFFICIENCY.
45 BlueEFFICIENCY.
Z
254 Service products and capacities
impaired during operation due to, for exam- coolant

ple, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is
therefore strongly recommended to observe Important safety notes
regular oil changes using an approved engine The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
oil with the appropriate SAE classification. freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
following tasks:
Ranti-corrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-

led with a coolant mixture that ensures
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
tion.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
brake fluid Further information on coolants and on fill-
G Risk of accident ing can be found in the Mercedes-Benz
Specifications for Service Products, MB
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
Approval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at
from the air; this lowers its boiling point.
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can
Technical data
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, also consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
vapour pockets may form in the brake system Centre.
when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when
driving downhill). This would impair braking ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
efficiency. even in countries where high temperatures
You should have the brake fluid renewed at prevail.
regular intervals. The brake fluid change inter- Otherwise, the cooling system will not be
vals can be found in the Service Booklet. sufficiently protected from corrosion, and
the boiling point will be too low.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in
Benz. Information about approved brake flu- the correct concentration, the boiling point of
ids can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz the coolant will be around 130 †.
Service Centre.
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
i There is usually a notice in the engine tion in the engine cooling system should:
compartment to remind you when the next Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
brake fluid change is due. cooling system against freezing down to
around -37 †.
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to - 45 †); otherwise, heat will not be
dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with
equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-
rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom-
Vehicle data 255
mends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor Maximum roof 75 kg

which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. load
! The engine cooling system is filled with
Maximum boot 100 kg
coolant that must be renewed after 15
load
years, or after 250,000 km at the latest.
Vehicle-specific weight information can be
found on the vehicle identification plate
Vehicle data (Y page 250).
Vehicle data, B 160
Vehicle dimensions Vehicle data, B 160 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle length 4273 mm Vehicle dimensions

(ECE)
Vehicle length 4273 mm
Vehicle width 2040 mm (ECE)
including exterior
mirrors Vehicle width 2040 mm
including exterior
Vehicle height46 1603 mm mirrors
Wheelbase 2778 mm Vehicle height48 1603 mm
Wheelbase 2778 mm
Technical data
Vehicle weights
Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Vehicle weights
directive)47
Unladen weight (in 1320 kg
Manual transmis- - accordance with
sion EC directive)
AUTOTRONIC 1350 kg The unladen weight includes the driver
(68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
The unladen weight includes the driver tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment
(68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel increase the unladen weight and reduce the
tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment maximum payload.
increase the unladen weight and reduce the
maximum payload. Maximum roof 75 kg
load
46 The values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment
and the state of the suspension.
47 Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
Z
256 Vehicle data
Vehicle weights Maximum roof 75 kg

load
Maximum boot 100 kg
load Maximum boot 100 kg
load
found on the vehicle identification plate Vehicle-specific weight information can be
(Y page 250). found on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 250).
Vehicle data, B 180

Vehicle data, B 180 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle length 4273 mm
(ECE) Vehicle length 4273 mm
(ECE)
Vehicle width 2040 mm
including exterior Vehicle width 2040 mm
mirrors including exterior
mirrors
Vehicle height 1603 mm
Vehicle height50 1603 mm
Wheelbase 2778 mm
Wheelbase 2778 mm
Technical data
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
Unladen weight (in accordance with EC
directive)49 Unladen weight (in 1330 kg
accordance with
Manual transmis- - EC directive)
sion
The unladen weight includes the driver
AUTOTRONIC - (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
The unladen weight includes the driver tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment
(68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel increase the unladen weight and reduce the
tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment maximum payload.
increase the unladen weight and reduce the Maximum roof 75 kg
maximum payload. load
Maximum boot 100 kg
load
found on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 250).
49 Missingvalues were not available at time of going to print.

50 Thevalues specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment
Vehicle data 257
Vehicle data, B 200 Vehicle data, B 200 Turbo
Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle length 4273 mm Vehicle length 4273 mm
(ECE) (ECE)
Vehicle width 2040 mm Vehicle width 2040 mm
including exterior including exterior
mirrors mirrors
Vehicle height51 1604 mm Vehicle height53 1604 mm
Wheelbase 2778 mm Wheelbase 2778 mm
Vehicle weights Vehicle weights

Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Unladen weight (in accordance with EC
directive)52 directive)
Manual transmis- 1345 kg Manual transmis- 1370 kg
sion sion
AUTOTRONIC 1390 kg AUTOTRONIC 1405 kg
The unladen weight includes the driver The unladen weight includes the driver
Technical data
(68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment
increase the unladen weight and reduce the increase the unladen weight and reduce the
maximum payload. maximum payload.
Maximum roof 75 kg Maximum roof 75 kg

load load
Maximum boot 100 kg Maximum boot 100 kg
load load
Vehicle-specific weight information can be Vehicle-specific weight information can be
found on the vehicle identification plate found on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 250). (Y page 250).
Z
258 Vehicle data
Vehicle data, B 180 CDI Vehicle data, B 200 CDI
Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle length 4273 mm Vehicle length 4273 mm
(ECE) (ECE)
Vehicle width 2040 mm Vehicle width 2040 mm
including exterior including exterior
mirrors mirrors
Vehicle height54 1604 mm Vehicle height55 1604 mm
Wheelbase 2778 mm Wheelbase 2778 mm
Vehicle weights Vehicle weights

Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Unladen weight (in accordance with EC
directive) directive)
Manual transmis- 1435 kg Manual transmis- 1435 kg
sion sion
AUTOTRONIC 1470 kg AUTOTRONIC 1470 kg
The unladen weight includes the driver The unladen weight includes the driver
Technical data
(68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment
increase the unladen weight and reduce the increase the unladen weight and reduce the
maximum payload. maximum payload.
Maximum roof 75 kg Maximum roof 75 kg

load load
Maximum boot 100 kg Maximum boot 100 kg
load load
Vehicle-specific weight information can be Vehicle-specific weight information can be
found on the vehicle identification plate found on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 250). (Y page 250).
Trailer tow hitch 259
Tailgate opening dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch fitted retro-
spectively without changing the electric
radiator fan and the cooling system com-
ponents, the braked and unbraked total
towing weight (trailer weight plus load
weight) is reduced to a maximum of 400 kg.
If higher towing weights are used, this can
result in damage to your vehicle's engine.
Any damage that may occur is not covered
by the warranty or the implied warranty.
Therefore, ensure that you always comply
with the maximum total towing weight
(max. 400 kg).
: Opening height
; Maximum headroom56
: ;
1980 – 1981 mm
i The values specified may differ from the

actual values depending on the tyres, load,
optional equipment and condition of the
suspension.
Technical data
Trailer tow hitch
Installation dimensions
G Risk of accident
Only have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz : Anchorage points
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz ; Overhang dimension
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, = Rear axle centre line
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the
systems must be carried out at a qualified
overhang dimension is 749 mm.
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,

changes to the cooling system may be nec-
essary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chas-
sis frame.
Z
260 Trailer tow hitch
Trailer loads
B 160 B 180 B 200 B 180 CDI

B 16057 B 18057 B 200 TURBO B 200 CDI
Permissible 1000 kg 1300 kg 1500 kg 1500 kg
trailer load,
braked58
Permissible 645 kg 645 kg 645 kg 715 kg
trailer load,
unbraked58
Maximum draw- 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg
bar noseweight59
Permissible rear 935 kg 935 kg 935 kg 935 kg
axle load when
towing a trailer
Technical data
57 BlueEFFICIENCY.
58 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.
59 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
Symbols Publication details
$ Warning Internet
% Environmental note
! Possible vehicle damage Further information about Mercedes-Benz
+ Tip vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
X Action required
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
YY Continuation symbol
http://www.daimler.com
(Y page) Page reference
Display Display in the multifunction dis-
play/COMAND display Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or

suggestions you may have regarding this
manual to the technical documentation team
at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: R822,
D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany
Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise
reproduced, in whole or in part, without the
written permission of Daimler AG.
As at 30.07.2010
B-Class
Owner's Manual
B-Class Owner's Manual
É2455847682Z102)ËÍ
2455847682Z102
Order no. 6515 1677 02 Part no. 245 584 76 82 Z102 Edition ÄJ 2010/Tc

Mercedes B200

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Mercedes B200

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Disclaimer

You are welcome to forward any queries or

The illustrations in this manual show a left-

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 19

Introduction ......................................... 16 Safety ................................................... 29

Opening and closing ........................... 55

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 67

Lights and windscreen wipers ........... 77

Climate control .................................... 93

Driving and parking .......................... 105

On-board computer and displays .... 147

Stowing and features ....................... 183

Maintenance and care ...................... 203

Breakdown assistance ..................... 215

Tyres and wheels .............................. 237

Technical data ................................... 247

1, 2, 3 ... Air dehumidification

Automatic engine switch-off Brake lamps

Wiper blades .................................. 212 Problems with "cooling with air

Delayed switch-off Driving safety system

Emergency unlocking Flat tyre

Genuine wood trim and trim strips Integrated child seat

Dipped-beam headlamps ................. 79 Memory card (on-board computer) . 153

Oil Parking aid

Side window Status line (on-board computer)

B 180 ............................................. 256 Display message ............................ 167

U Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 226

Protection of the environment Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

are listed in the original purchase agreement G Risk of accident

G Risk of accident and injury

Data stored in the vehicle

i Instrument cluster, kilometres Function Page

? Fuel gauge G Reset button

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Overhead control panel

The arrangement of the controls may vary,

Door control panel

Vehicle equipment .............................. 30

Vehicle equipment types of accidents, e.g. in situations where

cation of the Owner's Manual. Country-

passenger seat Rmagnitude

Based on the evaluation of this data, the air-

The triggering process must take place in Airbags

with sidebags instead of head/thorax side-

only use seat covers that have been approved

Rindependently of the front airbags seats to be moved forwards. This provides

G Risk of injury tion of the seat belt across the middle of

Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems should be fitted to the

Do not expose the child restraint system to

sons could be injured as a result. They could

i If the front-passenger airbag is disabled

G Risk of injury restrained in the event of an accident, heavy

tion instructions and the correct use of the

Problems with child seat recognition

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still on:

Integrated child seat tems is available from any Mercedes-Benz

Ris routed as low as possible across the pel-

Fastening a child's seat belt

G Risk of injury Rwhen the child seat is occupied, adjust the